ApeosPort-III C4400, DocuCentre-III C4400 User Guideonlinesupport.fujixerox.com/driver_downloads/UG-APDCIIIC4400.pdf · Table of Contents 1 Table of Contents Table of Contents

ApeosPort-III C4400DocuCentre-III C4400

User Guide

Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, and Microsoft Network are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries.Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and Adobe PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.EtherTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.RSA and BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.RSA Security Inc. All right reserved.All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots.For information on license, refer to About License.

XEROX, THE DOCUMENT COMPANY, Ethernet, CentreWare, and the stylized X are registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation. DocuWorks is a trademark of Xerox Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. All Xerox and Fuji Xerox product names are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.

The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk. Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.

Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or computer hacking.

Important1. This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not

be copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.2. Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.3. We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.4. Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual.

Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized operation of the equipment.

An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.

Table of Contents

1

Table of Contents

Table of Contents ........................................................................................................ 1

1 Before Using the Machine ........................................................................................ 9Preface ...................................................................................................................... 10

Types of Manuals ...................................................................................................... 11

Using This Guide ....................................................................................................... 12Organization of This Guide ................................................................................... 12Conventions .......................................................................................................... 13

Safety Notes .............................................................................................................. 15Electrical Safety .................................................................................................... 16Machine Installation .............................................................................................. 17Operational Safety ................................................................................................ 19Consumable.......................................................................................................... 22

Regulation ................................................................................................................. 23Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B) ................................................................. 23Product Safety Certification (UL, CB) ................................................................... 23

Environment .............................................................................................................. 24

About License............................................................................................................ 25RSA BSAFE.......................................................................................................... 25Heimdal................................................................................................................. 25LZMA .................................................................................................................... 25JPEG Code ........................................................................................................... 26Libcurl ................................................................................................................... 26FreeBSD ............................................................................................................... 26OpenLDAP............................................................................................................ 27DES....................................................................................................................... 29AES....................................................................................................................... 29TIFF (libtiff)............................................................................................................ 29ICC Profile (Little cms) .......................................................................................... 29XPS (XML Paper Specification) ............................................................................ 29EDICT and COMPDIC .......................................................................................... 29

Legal Notice............................................................................................................... 31

2 Product Overview .................................................................................................... 33

Machine Components................................................................................................ 34

Power On / Off........................................................................................................... 41Powering On ......................................................................................................... 41Powering Off ......................................................................................................... 42

Circuit Breaker........................................................................................................... 43

Energy Saver Mode................................................................................................... 44Entering the Energy Saver Mode.......................................................................... 44Exiting the Energy Saver Mode ............................................................................ 45

2

Control Panel..............................................................................................................46Full Size Color UI (Optional) ..................................................................................48Screens and Buttons Displayed.............................................................................50

Entering Text ..............................................................................................................51

3 Copy ..........................................................................................................................53Copying Procedure.....................................................................................................54

Step 1 Loading Documents ...................................................................................54Step 2 Selecting Features .....................................................................................56Step 3 Entering a Quantity.....................................................................................57Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.................................................................................58Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ......................................................59

Operations during Copying.........................................................................................60Stopping the Copy Job ..........................................................................................60Changing the Number of Copies ...........................................................................61Interrupting the Copy Job ......................................................................................62

Copy ...........................................................................................................................63Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies) ...........................................63Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ...................................................67Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying) .....................................................69Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................72Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)..........................................................73Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) .........................................73Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)........................................................73

Image Quality .............................................................................................................74Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).......................................................74Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of Images) ......75Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents / Adjusting Contrast) ................................................................................................................76Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)............................................................77Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..............................................................78Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone) ...................................................................78

Layout Adjustment......................................................................................................79Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .............................792 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)........................80Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)...................................82Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ......83Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ...................84Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)............................................................85Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images) ..........................................87Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) ..............................................89Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents) ...............892 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies).............................................................90

Output Format ............................................................................................................92Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) ...................................................................92

Table of Contents

3

Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies).................................................................... 95Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies) ........... 97Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ........................................ 98Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)........................... 99Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)...................................... 100Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies) .............. 101Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies) ............... 107Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security) ........................................... 109Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper) ................................................................. 111Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet) .................... 1112 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ......................................................... 112Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ....................................................... 112ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card) ........................................ 113

Job Assembly .......................................................................................................... 115Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ........................................................................................................ 115Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)................................... 119Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals) .......................................................... 120Delete Outside/Delete Inside(Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)............................................... 121Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job) .......................... 123

4 Fax .......................................................................................................................... 125Fax Procedure ......................................................................................................... 126

Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 126Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 128Step 3 Specifying Destinations ........................................................................... 129Step 4 Starting the Fax Job ................................................................................ 130Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status...................................................... 131

Operations during Faxing ........................................................................................ 132Stopping the Fax Job .......................................................................................... 132Changing the Scan Settings ............................................................................... 133

About Internet Fax ................................................................................................... 134Internet Fax Overview......................................................................................... 134Sending Internet Fax........................................................................................... 136Receiving Internet Fax ........................................................................................ 137Useful Features................................................................................................... 138

About Server Fax..................................................................................................... 141Sending Server Fax ............................................................................................ 141

Fax/Internet Fax ...................................................................................................... 143Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax) .................................................... 143+ Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients) .................................................... 144Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book.............................................. 145Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number) ................ 146Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button........................................... 147

4

Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen..........................................147Specifying a Destination using the Redial Feature ..............................................148Entering Specific Symbols ...................................................................................148Removing/Confirming a Recipient .......................................................................149Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density) ..............................................................1492 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals) .............................................150Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).....................................................151Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)................................................151

Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................1532 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals) .............................................153Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original).....................................153Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ....154Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)............................155Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio) .........................................................156

Fax/Internet Fax Options..........................................................................................157Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results) ...........................157Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode)...............................................159Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time) .......................160Transmission Header Text (Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes)..............................................................................................................161Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page) ................................162Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject) .................................164Internet Fax Message (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents) ..........................164Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine) ............165Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet) ....................................166Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox) ...........................................................166F Code (Using F Code Transmission) .................................................................168Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles) .........................................170Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME) ...................................171Digital Signature (Sending iFax with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)..................172

More Options............................................................................................................173Remote Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines) .......................173Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine) ..............................................................................................................175On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)..........176

Broadcast .................................................................................................................178Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients).........................................178Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station) ................178Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations) ..182

Receiving Faxes.......................................................................................................187Switching between Auto Receive and Manual Receive.......................................187Using Auto Receive .............................................................................................187Using Manual Receive.........................................................................................188Using Mailbox Receive ........................................................................................188

Facsimile Information Services ................................................................................189

Table of Contents

5

Using the Receiver.............................................................................................. 189When Not Using a Receiver................................................................................ 190

5 Scan ........................................................................................................................ 191Scanning Procedure ................................................................................................ 192

Step 1 Loading Documents................................................................................. 192Step 2 Selecting Features................................................................................... 194Step 3 Starting the Scan Job .............................................................................. 195Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ................................................... 197Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data........................................................................ 197

Operations during Scanning .................................................................................... 198Stopping the Scan Job........................................................................................ 198Changing Scan Settings ..................................................................................... 199

E-mail ...................................................................................................................... 201Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address) ................................................... 201New Recipient (Entering an Address)................................................................. 204Add Me (Adding the Sender’s Address).............................................................. 205Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient) ....................................................................... 205From (Setting the Sender’s Address).................................................................. 206Subject (Setting the Subject) .............................................................................. 207Message (Entering the E-mail Body) .................................................................. 207Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)....................................................... 2072 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 207Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 207File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)........................................ 207

Scan to Mailbox ....................................................................................................... 208Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)....................................................... 2082 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 208Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 208

Network Scanning ................................................................................................... 209Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)....................................................... 2102 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 210Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 210File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)........................................ 210

Scan to PC .............................................................................................................. 211Transfer Protocol ................................................................................................ 211Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book) .............. 212Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network).................. 212Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen Keyboard) ............................................................................................... 213Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)....................................................... 2142 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)................................... 214Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .................................................... 214File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)........................................ 214

General Scan Features ........................................................................................... 215

6

Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)........................................................2152 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ...................................216Original Type (Selecting the Document Type).....................................................217File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data).........................................218

Advanced Settings ...................................................................................................225Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)......................................................225Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness).........................226Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast) ..............................................................................................................226Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)........................227Color Space (Specifying Color Space) ................................................................227

Layout Adjustment....................................................................................................228Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)...................................................2282 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ...................................228Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ..........................229Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size) ................................................................230Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ....230Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .................231Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)...................................................233

E-mail Options/Filing Options...................................................................................234Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning).....234Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts).........................................................235Split Send (Sending in Sections) .........................................................................235File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent) .......................................236Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address) ...............................................................236File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict) ........237Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved) ..........................237Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME) ............................................237Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) ..............238Login Name .........................................................................................................238Password .............................................................................................................238Meta Data ............................................................................................................238

6 Send from Mailbox .................................................................................................239

Mailbox Operating Procedure...................................................................................240Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen ................................................240Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox ..................................................................................240Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ..................................................241Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents .................................................................241

Selecting a Mailbox ..................................................................................................242

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox ..........................................................243

Checking Document Details .....................................................................................245

Printing Documents in a Mailbox..............................................................................246

Configuring/Starting Job Flow ..................................................................................249Job Flow Restrictions...........................................................................................253

Table of Contents

7

7 Job Flow Sheets .................................................................................................... 255Job Flow Procedure................................................................................................. 256

Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ................................................... 256Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet ..................................................................... 257Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet ............................................... 257Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet .................................................................... 257

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet..................................................................... 258

8 Stored Programming............................................................................................. 261

Stored Programming Overview ............................................................................... 262

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs................................................... 263Registering Stored Programs.............................................................................. 264Registering Stored Programs for Build Job......................................................... 265Deleting Stored Programs................................................................................... 266Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name ...................................................... 266Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs ................................................. 267

Calling a Stored Program ........................................................................................ 268Calling a Stored Program for Build Job............................................................... 269

9 Web Applications .................................................................................................. 271Web Applications..................................................................................................... 272

Accessing Web Applications ................................................................................... 273

Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the All Services Screen ........................... 274

10 Media Print (Text and Photos).............................................................................. 275Overview of Media Print .......................................................................................... 276

Supported Media and File Formats..................................................................... 276Notes and Restrictions........................................................................................ 277

Components and their Functions............................................................................. 279

Inserting and Ejecting Media ................................................................................... 280Inserting Media ................................................................................................... 280Ejecting Media .................................................................................................... 280

Selecting Files ......................................................................................................... 281[Select From List] Screen.................................................................................... 282

Setting the Printing Options..................................................................................... 283Media Print - Photos ........................................................................................... 283Media Print - Text................................................................................................ 284Index Print........................................................................................................... 285

11 Job Status .............................................................................................................. 287Job Status Overview................................................................................................ 288

Checking Current/Pending Jobs.............................................................................. 289

Checking Completed Jobs....................................................................................... 290

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents ................................................................ 291

8

Secure Print .........................................................................................................291Sample Set ..........................................................................................................293Delayed Print .......................................................................................................294Charge Print.........................................................................................................296Private Charge Print ............................................................................................298Public Mailbox......................................................................................................300Undelivered Faxes...............................................................................................301

Printing Pending Jobs ..............................................................................................302

Handling Error Terminations ....................................................................................303

12 Computer Operations ............................................................................................305Features Overview ...................................................................................................306

Print ..........................................................................................................................307Print Features ......................................................................................................307Setup ...................................................................................................................308Printing.................................................................................................................309

E-mail Printing ..........................................................................................................310Setup ...................................................................................................................310Sending E-Mail ....................................................................................................310

Sending Fax .............................................................................................................312Registering Destinations......................................................................................312

Importing Scanned Data...........................................................................................314Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application ....................................................314Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3 .......................................................................316Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services ...................................................318Importing Using EasyOperator ............................................................................320

CentreWare Internet Services ..................................................................................321

13 Appendix .................................................................................................................325Glossary ...................................................................................................................326

Index...............................................................................................................................333

1 Before Using the Machine

This chapter describes how to use this guide, as well as safety notes and legal notice you need to read before using the machine.

Preface .......................................................................................................10

Types of Manuals .......................................................................................11

Using This Guide ........................................................................................12

Safety Notes ...............................................................................................15

Regulation...................................................................................................23

Environment................................................................................................24

About License .............................................................................................25

Legal Notice................................................................................................31


10

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Preface

Thank you for selecting the ApeosPort-III C4400, DocuCentre-III C4400 (hereafter referred to as “the machine”).This guide explains how to operate the machine and the precautions that must be followed during operation. To get the most out of the machine and to use it effectively, be sure to read this guide before use. This guide assumes that an operator has a basic knowledge of the operating environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer. For information on the environment of the personal computer in use, basic knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer, refer to the manuals provided with the personal computer, operating system, and network system.After reading this guide, be sure to keep it handy for quick reference. It will be useful in case you forget how to perform operations or if a problem occurs with the machine.For instructions on configuring your network environment, refer to the Administrator Guide. For information about optional accessories for the printer functionality, also refer to the guide provided with each optional accessory.

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol . Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures.

The equipment is certified by NEMKO in compliance with [IEC60950-1 (AS/NZS 3260)]. The equipment is manufactured under an ISO 9001 Quality System. The equipment is also certified in compliance with applicable standards by various national bodies.The equipment was tested and is certified by the New Zealand Ministry of Commerce in conformance with CISPR publ. 22 (AS/NZISS CISPR22:2002) which relates to radio frequency interference regulations, and also complies with the Australian Communication Authority requirements.

NOTE: Machines intended for use in South Korea and Taiwan have been certified separately in compliance with their requirements.Any unauthorized alteration, which includes the addition of new functions or the connection of external devices, may impact this certification.Contact your local Xerox representative for a list of approved accessories.

Types of Manuals

11

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Types of Manuals

We provide the following guides for optimum usage of the machine.

Accompanying ManualsThe machine comes with the following documentation, which is referred to as accompanying manuals. The accompanying manuals include the descriptions of how to configure and use the machine.

User Guide (this guide)Describes all the necessary steps for copy/print/scan/fax.

Administrator GuideAimed toward machine administrators, this guide describes how to set up the network environment and how to solve problems that may occur with the machine.

Quick Reference GuideIntroduces the basic operations of the machine, as well as daily management and maintenance.

Manual (HTML)A guide for installing print drivers, configuring the printer environment, etc. This manual is included in the CD-ROM on the Driver CD Kit.

Guides for Optional AccessoriesOptional accessories are available for this machine. Some of them come with user guides. The user guides, provided as printed or online documentation, are referred to as guides for optional accessories.The guides for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for using the optional accessories and installing the software.


12

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Using This Guide

This guide provides all the necessary copy/print/fax/scan operating procedures, and precautions.

Organization of This GuideThis guide consists of the following chapters.

1 Before Using the MachineDescribes how to use this guide as well as cautions on using the product safely and legally.

2 Product OverviewDescribes machine’s basic information such as the names of components, how to switch on and off, how to use the touch screen, and how to set the energy saver feature.

3 CopyDescribes the copy features and operations.

4 FaxDescribes the fax features and operations.

5 ScanDescribes the scan features and operations

6 Send from MailboxDescribes the mailbox features and how to work with mailboxes.

7 Job Flow sheetsDescribes operations using a job flow created on a remote system.

8 Stored ProgrammingDescribes the stored programming feature.

9 Web ApplicationsDescribes the operations to connect to web applications.

10 Media Print (Text and Photos)Describes basic operations and features of Media Print that allows you to print image data or document files.

11 Job StatusDescribes how to check job status and to cancel jobs.

12 Computer OperationsDescribes operations performed from a computer, such as printing documents, importing scanned documents, Direct Fax, as well as using CentreWare Internet Services.

13 AppendixA glossary of terms used in this guide.

Using This Guide

13

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Conventions

The screen images and illustrations that are used in this guide are based on the machine configuration with the various options. Some of the items in the screen images may not be displayed or there may be features that cannot be used depending on the machine configuration.

In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.

The following terms are used in this guide:Important : Indicates important information that you should read.Note : Indicates additional information on operations or features.

The following symbols are used in this guide:" " : • A cross-reference included in this guide.

: • Refers to names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen messages and input text.

[ ] : • Refers to folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed in the touch screen.

• The names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and menu names.

< > button : Indicates a hardware button on the computer.< > key : Indicates a key on the keyboard of the computer.> : • Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on the

control panel. Example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools] > [Setup] > [Mailbox]", this means that you need to select [Tools], select [Setup], and then select [Mailbox].

• Indicates a path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.Example: When you see the procedure "to search for files and folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or Folders]", this means that you need to click [Start], click [Search], and then click [For Files or Folders] in order to search for files and folders.

• The reference is indicated in the following manner:"Refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tone" in the Administrator Guide." The sentence above means that you need to refer to the section "Audio Tone", which can be found under "Common Service Settings" in chapter 5 Tools of the Administrator Guide.


14

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows:, ,Long Edge Feed (LEF):Loading with one of the long edges of the document or

paper., ,Short Edge Feed (SEF):Loading with one of the short edges of the document

or paper.

LEF Orientation

Paper feed direction

SEF Orientation

Paper feed direction

Safety Notes

15

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Safety Notes

Before using this product, read "Safety Notes" carefully for safety use.This product and recommended supplies have been tested and found to comply with strict safety requirements including safety agency approvals and compliance with environmental standards. Follow the following instructions for safety use.

Follow all warning instructions marked on this product. The warning marks stand for the followings:

WARNINGAny unauthorized alteration including an addition of new functions or connection to external devices may not be covered by the product warranty. Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for more information.

Used for item that if not followed strictly, can lead death or severe or fatal injuries and the possibility to do it is comparatively high.

Used for items that if not followed strictly, can lead to severe or fatal injuries.

Used for items that if not followed strictly, can cause injuries to user or damages to machine.

: A symbol for items to pay attention to when handling machine. Follow instructions carefully to use machine safely.

: A symbol for prohibited items. Follow instructions carefully to avoid any dangerous acts.

: A symbol for items that must be performed. Follow instructions carefully to carry out these essential tasks.

Caution Flammable Explodable Electricshock

Heatedsurface

Moving object

Pinchedfingers

Prohibited No fire Do nottouch

Do not usein bathroom

Do nottear down

Keep awayfrom wet

Never touch

Instructions Unplug Ground/Earth


16

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Electrical Safety

This product shall be operated by the power source as indicated on the product's data plate. Consult your local power company to check if your power source meets the requirements.

WARNING: Connect this product to a protective earth circuit.This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin. The plug fits only into an earthed electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. If the plug doesn't fit to the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the outlet to avoid risk of electric shock. Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to the electrical outlet that has no earth connection terminal.Improper connection of a grounding conductor may cause electric shock.Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. To prevent overheat and a fire accident, do not use an extension cord, a multi-plug adaptor or a multiple connector. Consult your local Fuji Xerox representative to check if an outlet is grounded.Connect this product to a branch circuit or an outlet that has larger capacity than the rated ampere and voltage of this product. See the data plate on the rear panel of this product for its rated ampere and voltage.Never touch the power cord with wet hands. It may cause electric shock.

Do not place an object on the power cord.

Always keep the plug connection free of dust. The dusty and damp environment may bring about minute electric current in a connector. It may generate heat and eventually cause a fire accident.To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, only use the power cord supplied with this product or the ones designated by Fuji Xerox.The power cord is exclusive use for this product. Do not use it for any other product.Do not damage or alter the power cord. Damage and alteration may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its replacement. Do not use a damaged or uninsulated cord to avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident.

When cleaning this product, always switch off and unplug it. Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock.

Do not unplug or re-plug this product with the switch on. Plugging and unplugging a live connector may deform the plug and generate heat, and eventually cause a fire accident.Hold the plug not the cord when unplugging this product, or it may damage the cord and cause electric shock or a fire accident.

Switch off and unplug the product when it (i.e., fax function) is not used over weekends or long holidays. Please note that it cannot receive fax message during switch-off.

Safety Notes

17

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Once a month, switch off this product and check ifthe power cord is plugged firmly into an electrical outlet;the plug is not excessively heated, rusted or bent;the plug and electrical outlet are free of dust; andthe power cord is not cracked or worn down.

Once you notice any unusual condition, switch off and unplug this product first and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Machine Installation

Do not locate this product where people might step on or trip over the power cord. Friction or excessive pressure may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident.

Never locate this product in the following places:Near radiators or any other heat sourcesNear volatile flammable materials such as curtainsIn the hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environmentIn the place receiving direct sunlightNear cookers or humidifiers

Locate this product on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand a weight of 270 Kg (maximum weight when C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed). Otherwise, if tilted, the product may fall over and cause injuries.

Locate this product in a well-ventilated area. Do not obstruct ventilation openings of the product.Keep the minimum clearance as follows for ventilation and an access to the power plug. Unplug the product if an abnormal condition is noted.

1067

400

420

794

100

1714

96750 50

Main Body

(Unit: mm)


18

Before U

sing the Machine

1

2117

305

1714

50400

425

789

100

50

2217

With B-Finisher (optional) and Side Tray (optional)

(Unit: mm)

2106

90

1738

50400

425

813

100

50

2206

With C-Finisher (optional) and Side Tray (optional)

(Unit: mm)

1851

1719

50400

425

794

100

50

1951

(Unit: mm)

With C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) and Side Tray (optional)

Safety Notes

19

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Do not incline the product at more than 10 degree angle. Otherwise, it may fall over and cause injuries.

Always lock the wheels of this product after installation. Otherwise, it may fall over or slide and cause injuries.

Always locate the output unit inside the rack under the scanning unit.

To keep this product in a good performance and condition, always use it in the following environment: Temperature: 10 - 32°C Humidity: 15 - 85%

When the product is left in a chilly room and the room is rapidly warmed up by heater, dew condensation may form inside the product and cause a partial deletion on printing.

Operational Safety

The operator's product maintenance procedures are described in the customer documentation supplied with this product. Do not carry out any other maintenance procedures not described in the documentation.This product features safety design not to allow operators access to hazard areas. The hazard areas are isolated from operators by covers or protectors which require a tool to remove. To prevent electric shock and injuries, never remove those covers and protectors.


20

Before U

sing the Machine

1

To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident, switch off and unplug the product promptly in the following conditions, then contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

The product emits smoke or its surface is unusually hot.The product emits unusual noise or odor.The power cord is cracked or worn down.A circuit breaker, fuse or any other safety device is activated.Any liquid is spilled into the product.The product is soaked in water.Any part of the product is damaged.

Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product.Do not place any of the followings on the product:

Liquid container such as flower vases or coffee cupsMetal parts such as staples or clipsHeavy objects

If liquid is spilled over or metal parts are slipped into the product, it may cause electric shock or a fire accident.Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-coated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a fire accident.

When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative. Do not pull out a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.

Never play the CD-ROM supplied with the product on an audio player. Always use a CD-ROM player. Otherwise, large sound may damage audio players or your ears.Laser SafetyCAUTION: Any operations or adjustments not stated in the operation manual may cause hazardous light exposure and eventually burn injuries or loss of eyesight.This product has been tested and found to comply with the Class 1 Laser Equipment requirements defined by the international standard IEC60825 and has no light exposure hazard. The product has no hazardous light emission as it features light protection components and covers to shut in all light beam during operation and maintenance.

Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product.To avoid the risk of burn injuries and electric shock, never touch the area with the "High Temperature" or "High Voltage" marks on.Keep electrical and mechanical safety interlocks active. Keep the safety interlocks away from magnetic materials. Magnetic materials may accidentally activate the product and cause injuries or electric shock.

Safety Notes

21

Before U

sing the Machine

1

A circuit breaker is embedded in this product. If current leakage occurs, the circuit breaker automatically cuts off power circuit to prevent electric shock and a fire accident. The circuit breaker is normally ON ("|"). Check once a month if the circuit breaker works properly in accordance with the following procedures:(1) Turn off the power of the product.(2) Push the RESET button of the circuit breaker and make sure the button is

kept retracted even after the pushing force is released.(3) Push the TEST button lightly with a sharp edge such as pen tip and make

sure that the RESET button returns to the projected position.This is the end of the check procedure.

(4) Push the RESET button again and make sure the button is kept retracted.

If the circuit does not work properly, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product, particularly a paper wrapped around a fuser or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries or burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.Never touch the paper output area of the finisher during operation. It may cause injuries.

Be careful in removing jammed staples.

Do not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the document glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

Ventilate well during extended operation or mass copying. It may affect the office air environment due to odor such as ozone in a poorly ventilated room.Provide proper ventilation to ensure the comfortable and safe environment.To move this product to another location, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

Power switch

Reset button

Test button


22

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Consumable

Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on its package or container.

Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.Never throw a waste toner bottle into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.If you have a used waste toner bottle no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal.CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

Keep the drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and consult a physician immediately.When replacing the drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth as well as inhalation.If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water.If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water and consult a physician immediately.

Regulation

23

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Regulation

Radio Frequency Emissions (Class B)This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to the International Standard for Electromagnetic Interference (CISPR Publ. 22) and Radiocommunications Act 1992 in Australia/New Zealand. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning this product off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between this product and the receiver.

Connect this product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Changes and modifications to this product not specifically approved by Fuji Xerox may void the user’s authority to operate this product.

Product Safety Certification (UL, CB)This product is certified by the following agency using the safety standards listed.Agency StandardNEMKO IEC60950-1:ed. 1


24

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Environment

Emissions of dust, ozone, benzene, total volatile organic compounds (TVOC) and styrene from this product have been tested and found to comply with the Eco Mark criteria on chemical emission for copiers. According to the test procedures defined by Blue Angel RAL UZ-122: 2006 Appendix 2, the test was performed under the condition of monochrome copying, using the toner type ApeosPort-III C4400, DocuCentre-III C4400 toner (black) that is recommended for this product.

For environmental protection and efficient use of resources, Fuji Xerox reuses returned toner cartridges and drum cartridges to make recycle parts, recycle materials or energy recovery.

Proper disposal is required for toner cartridges and drum cartridges no longer needed. Do not open toner cartridges and drum cartridges. Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative.

About License

25

Before U

sing the Machine

1

About License

This section describes information about licenses. Be sure to read through it.

RSA BSAFE

This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software from RSA Security Inc.

HeimdalCopyright (c)2000 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden). All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

LZMALZMA SDK 4.21 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-08)http://www.7-zip.org/

LZMA SDK 4.22 Copyright (c) 1999-2005 Igor Pavlov (2005-06-10)http://www.7-zip.org/


26

Before U

sing the Machine

1

JPEG CodeOur printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group.

LibcurlCOPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) 1996 - 2006, Daniel Stenberg, <[email protected]>. All rights reserved. Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

FreeBSDThis product contains the part of FreeBSD codes.

The FreeBSD Copyright Copyright 1994-2006 The FreeBSD Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

About License

27

Before U

sing the Machine

1

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE FREEBSD PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FREEBSD PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.

OpenLDAPCopyright 1998-2006 The OpenLDAP Foundation All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.

A copy of this license is available in the file LICENSE in the top-level directory of the distribution or, alternatively, at <http://www.OpenLDAP.org/license.html>.

OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.

Individual files and/or contributed packages may be copyright by other parties and/or subject to additional restrictions.

This work is derived from the University of Michigan LDAP v3.3 distribution. Information con-cerning this software is available at <http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/ldap.html>.

This work also contains materials derived from public sources.

Additional information about OpenLDAP can be obtained at <http://www.openldap.org/>.---Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Kurt D. Zeilenga.Portions Copyright 1998-2006 Net Boolean Incorporated.Portions Copyright 2001-2006 IBM Corporation.All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted only as authorized by the OpenLDAP Public License.---


28

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Howard Y.H. Chu.Portions Copyright 1999-2005 Symas Corporation.Portions Copyright 1998-2003 Hallvard B. Furuseth.All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that this notice is preserved.The names of the copyright holders may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without their specific prior written permission. This software is provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.---Portions Copyright (c) 1992-1996 Regents of the University of Michigan.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that this notice is preserved and that due credit is given to the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. This software is provided ''as is'' without express or implied warranty.------------------------------------------The OpenLDAP Public License Version 2.8, 17 August 2003

Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and

notices, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution, and

3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document..

The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time.Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

About License

29

Before U

sing the Machine

1

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI-GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.

OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.

Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.

DESThis product includes software developed by Eric Young([email protected])

AESCopyright (c) 2003. Dr Brian Gladman. Worcester. UK. All rights reserved.This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladman under BSD licensing terms.

TIFF (libtiff)Lib TIFF copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam lefflerCopyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics. Inc.

ICC Profile (Little cms)Little cms copyright (c) 1988-2004 Marti Maria

XPS (XML Paper Specification)This product may incorporate intellectual property owned by Microsoft Corporation. The terms and conditions upon which Microsoft is licensing such intellectual property may be found at http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=52369.

EDICT and COMPDICThe Japanese-English dictionaries (EDICT and COMPDIC) edited by The Electronic Dictionary Research and Development Group under the coordination of Professor James William Breen at Monash University are used in the searchable PDF kit option of Fuji Xerox.


30

Before U

sing the Machine

1

These Japanese-English dictionary files are licensed to customers under the terms and conditions of a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License. Prior to use, be sure to check the terms and conditions of this license at the URL below. Use of these Japanese-English dictionaries is not permitted unless you agree to the terms and conditions of this license.Furthermore, care should be taken because at the point in time that you begin to use these Japanese-English dictionaries as specified in the said license, you accept and agree to be bound by the terms and conditions of this license.

The Japanese-English dictionaries are provided to customers on an as-is basis, and Fuji Xerox and the original supplier make no representations of warranties of any kind.

Original Author Information (extracted from http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/edrdg/licence.html) Copyright over the documents covered by this statement is held by James William BREEN and The Electronic Dictionary Research and Development Group at Monash University.

Monash University License Information http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/edrdg/licence.html

Information Regarding EDICT and COMPDIC http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/edict.html http://www.csse.monash.edu.au/~jwb/compdic_doc.html

Information Regarding the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike License http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5/legalcode

Legal Notice

31

Before U

sing the Machine

1

Legal Notice

Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country. Penalties of fines or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty. The following are examples of items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country.

Currency

Banknotes and checks

Bank and government bonds and securities

Passports and identification cards

Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner

Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments

This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.

2 Product Overview

This chapter describes machine’s basic information such as the names of components, how to switch on and off, and how to use the touch screen.

Machine Components.................................................................................34

Power On / Off ............................................................................................41

Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................43

Energy Saver Mode ....................................................................................44

Control Panel ..............................................................................................46

Entering Text ..............................................................................................51

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

Machine Components

This section describes the main components and functions of the machine.

4-Tray Model

No. Component Function

1 Document cover Holds the document down.

2 Document glass Originals are loaded here.

3 Control panel Consists of operation buttons, LED indicators and a touch screen.Refer to "Control Panel" (P.46).

4 Center output tray(Output tray)

Printed or copied documents are delivered with the printed side facing down.

5 Paper stopper Set upright for use when making copies or prints.

6 Power switch Switches the power of the machine on/off.

7 Front cover Open this cover to replace consumables.

8 Tray 1, 2, 3, 4 (optional) Accommodates paper.

9 Tray 5 (Bypass) Used for loading non-standard paper (thick-stock paper, and other special media) that cannot be loaded in the Trays 1 to 4.

10 Locking casters Used for locking the wheels of the machine. Lock these casters after moving the machine to its installation site.

5

6

7

8

10

9

1

34

2

34

Machine ComponentsProduct O

verview

2

Left side and Back


1 Top left cover Push up the unlock lever to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams and replace consumables.

2 Duplex module cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams when the duplex module is installed.

3 Left center cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

4 Bottom left cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

5 <RESET> button Automatically turns the power off when detecting current leakage.

6 Parallel interface connector(optional)

Connected to a computer using a Centronics standard interface cable.

7 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX connector

Connected to a network cable.

8 Fax interface connector Used to connect to the fax kit.

9 USB 2.0 interface connector (optional)

Connected to a USB cable.

12

3

45

6

789

Tray 4(high capacity)

Tray 3(high capacity)

10

Tandem Tray Model + Side Output Tray

35

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

Inside

10 Side output tray (optional) Copies and prints are delivered here facing up.


1 Stopper Fastens the handle in place.

2 Toner cartridge Four toner (image forming powder) cartridges are provided: Black (K1), Cyan (C), Magenta (M) and Yellow (Y).

3 Handle Unlock stopper and press this down when replacing the drum cartridges.

4 Drum cartridge(A1, A2, A3, A4)

Contains a photo conductor.Drum cartridges are arranged in order A1, A2, A3 and A4 from the left as you face the main body.

5 Waste toner bottle cover A waste toner bottle (B), which stores waste toner, is located at the other side of this cover. Open this cover to access the insides of the machine when replacing the waste toner bottle.

6 Fuser (E) Fuses the printed image on the paper by fusing the toner. Do not touch this unit as it is extremely hot.


12

3

4

5

6

36


verview

2

Duplex automatic document feeder (optional)

Note • In this guidebook, Duplex Auto Document Feeder (Optional) is referred to as Document Feeder.


1 Confirmation indicator This indicator lights to confirm that the document is loaded correctly.

2 Lever Turn this lever to clear paper jams.

3 Left cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

4 Inner cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

5 Document guides Use these guides to align the edges of documents.

6 Document feeder tray Load the originals.

7 Document output tray Delivers scanned documents

8 Document glass Scans the loaded documents.

7

1 2 3 5 64

8

37

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

Telephone Line Connectors

Note • Fax feature is not provided for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• LINE 2 (line 2) and LINE 4 (line 4) are optional.

No. Name on the machine cover

Screen displayed on the touch screen while

operating

Function

1 OP.TEL - Use this interface to connect an external telephone receiver fitted with an extra G3 kit (optional). Do not connect to the TEL connector; external telephones cannot be connected to the TEL connector.

2 TEL - Used to connect an external telephone. Do not connect devices other than telephones. If the "TEL" connector is covered and you cannot connect a telephone, contact our Customer Support Center.

3 LINE 1 Line 1 Connected to a public telephone network.



54

1

23

38


verview

2

B-Finisher (optional)

Note • B-Finisher optional. When an explanation refers commonly to B-Finisher and C-Finisher, it is described as "Finisher".

• The power cord connected to B-Finisher is a connecting cord dedicated to the machine. Do not connect this cord to any other devices than the machine.


1 Finisher top cover button Press this button to open the upper cover of the finisher when clearing paper jams.

2 Finisher tray Stapled documents are delivered.

3 Front cover Open this cover to clear staple jams, or replace staples.

4 Staple cartridge Contains staples. Pull out the cartridge to clear staple jams, or replace staples.

5 Stand Connects the machine and the finisher.

6 Finisher transport cover Open this cover to clear paper jams. Make sure to move the finisher to the right before opening the cover.

7 Center tray exit Open this cover to clear paper jams.

6

7

2

54

3

1

39

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

C-Finisher (optional) and C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional)

Note • C-Finisher and C-Finisher with Booklet Maker are optional. When an explanation refers commonly to B-Finisher and C-Finisher, they are described as "Finisher".


1 Front cover Open this cover when clearing paper jams, replacing or adding staples, clearing staple jams, or throwing punch scraps.

2 Output tray Receives documents.

3 Exit cover Open this cover to access the insides of the machine to clear paper jams.

4 Finisher tray Delivers stapled outputs.

5 Staple cartridge Contains staples. Draw out this cartridge when replacing or adding staples, or clearing staple jams.

6 Booklet tray Documents are delivered here when Folding is selected in the booklet creation function.

7 Booklet unit Folds and staples outputs.

8 Center tray (Front transport cover)

Delivers copies and prints when they are unable to be delivered to the output or finisher tray.Pull the cover upward when clearing paper jams.Note • Remove outputs delivered to the center tray constantly.

8

7

6

4

1

5

3

2

40

Power On / OffProduct O

verview

2

Power On / Off

To use the machine, turn its power on. The machine takes approximately 70 seconds to warm up and to be ready to copy or print. This may take more time depending on your machine configuration. Switch the power off at the end of the day or when not using the machine for an extended period of time.Use also the Energy Saver feature to save power consumption while the machine is not in use.For information on the Energy Saver feature, refer to"Energy Saver Mode" (P.44).Important • If the machine is powered off, all the features of the machine will stop. When using the

machine throughout the day for jobs such as receiving fax, do not power it off.

Powering On

Follow the step below to switch the power on.

1 Press the power switch to the [|] position to turn the power on.Note • The “Please wait...” message indicates

that the machine is warming up. The machine is not available during warming up. The machine will be ready for use in 70 seconds. The time may vary depending on the machine configuration.

Note • If the machine does not power on, check that the power cord is plugged in, and the RESET button is in the reset position (depressed).

41

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

Powering OffFollow the steps below to switch the power off.Important • Switching the power off may erase the data being processed.

1 Before turning the power off, make sure that all copy or print jobs have completely finished. Also, make sure that the <Online> indicator is not lit.Important • Do not switch the power off in the following situations:

- While data is being received- While a job is being printed.- While a job is being copied- While a job is being scanned

• When turning off the machine, wait 5 seconds after outputs have been delivered.

2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position.Important • Power off processing is performed internally on the machine for a while after the power

switch is turned off. Therefore, do not unplug the power cord from the power outlet immediately after turning the power switch off.

Note • When powering the machine on after it has been turned off, wait 10 seconds after the touch screen has gone dark.

42

Circuit BreakerProduct O

verview

2

Circuit Breaker

The machine is provided with a circuit breaker.In the event of a current leakage, the breaker will automatically cut off the power circuit to prevent any leakage or fire from occurring.The <RESET> button is normally in a pressed-in state as shown in the figure on the right. When the machine is to be left unused for a long period of time or is to be moved, lightly press the <TEST> button with the tip of a ball-pen or other fine-tipped object to cancel the pressed-in state of the <RESET> button.Once a month, check the breaker for correct operation. Also, make sure that it is earthed. If not, the breaker cannot detect current leakage which can cause electric shock.When there is a fault in the circuit breaker, contact our Customer Support Center.Note • The RESET button automatically turns the machine off when a current leakage is detected.

Normally, you do not operate the button.• When you release the depressed RESET button, make sure that the machine has been

switched off.For information on how to check if the circuit breaker is working, refer to "Electrical Safety" (P.16).

Power switch

Reset button

Test button

43

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

Energy Saver Mode

The machine is installed with the Energy Saver feature that will automatically cut off the electricity to the machine if no copy or print data is received for a certain duration.The Energy Saver feature has two modes: Low Power mode and Sleep mode.The machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has elapsed if the machine is left unused for a fixed period of time.The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time elapses.To enter the Energy Saver mode, press the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel, and then the machine enters the Energy Saver mode straight away.

Low Power ModeIn this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power.The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Energy Saver feature is cancelled.

Sleep ModeIn this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode.The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the <Energy Saver> button. The <Energy Saver> button goes out to indicate that the Energy Saver feature is cancelled.

Entering the Energy Saver ModeThe following describes how to enter the Energy Saver mode.

1 Press the <Energy Saver> button. Note • The machine will not enter the Energy

Saver mode while copy or print jobs are in progress. Press the <Energy Saver> button after finishing the jobs.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Energy Saver> button

44

Energy Saver ModeProduct O

verview

2

Exiting the Energy Saver ModeThe following describes how to exit the Energy Saver mode.The Energy Saver mode is exited in the following instances:

Pressing the <Energy Saver> button

Receiving data

Selecting [Apply] in CentreWare Internet Services

1 Press the <Energy Saver> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Energy Saver> button

45

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

Control Panel

The following describes the names and functions of components on the control panel.


1 Touch screen Displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations and set features.

2 <Online> indicator Lights when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client.

3 <Job in Memory> indicator Lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.You can check stored documents in [Stored Documents List]. For information on [Stored Documents List], refer to “4 Machine Status” > “Machine Information” > “Print Reports” > “Job Status/Activity Report” > “Stored Document List” in the Administrator Guide.

4 <Job Status> button Press this button to check or cancel the current job, to check or print saved documents, or to check completed jobs.

5 <Review> button Press this button to display the [Review] screen. In this screen, you can check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have changed from the defaults. You can also check the details of fax and e-mail recipients.

6 <Machine Status> button Press this button to check the machine status and meters, to check the status of consumables, and to print reports.

7 <Log In/Out> button Press this button to display the User ID entry screen for logging into the System Administration mode, Authentication mode, or Account Administration mode. Press this button to log out as well.

8 <Energy Saver> button If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power consumption is lowered to enter the Energy Saver mode. In the Energy Saver mode, this button lights up. To enter the Energy Saver mode, press this button. To cancel the Energy Saver mode, press this button again.

9 <Clear All> button Returns the settings you made to the default values. The machine returns to the same state as when it is powered on.

001 002 003

004 005 006

007 008 009

010 011 012

013 014 015

016 017 018

019 020 021

022 023 024

025 026 027

028 029 030

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0

C

46

Control PanelProduct O

verview

2

10 <Interrupt> button Press this button to suspend a copy or print job in progress to have the machine process another job. During the Interrupt mode, the <Interrupt> button lights up. Pressing the <Interrupt> button again exits the Interrupt mode and resumes the suspended job.Some types of jobs cannot be executed in the Interrupt mode. Refer to “15 Appendix” > “Notes and Restrictions” > “Notes and Restrictions in the Interrupt Mode” in the Administrator Guide.

11 <Stop> button Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.

12 <Start> button Press this button to start scanning a document.

13 Numeric keypad Use the numeric buttons on the keypad to enter the number of copies, passwords and other numerical values.

14 <Speed Dial> button Press this button to specify a recipient with an address number when sending a fax or e-mail.

15 <C (Clear)> button Press this button if you have entered a wrong numerical value with the numeric keypad.

16 <Dial Pause> button Used to insert a pause into a destination number.

17 <Custom> buttons Press this button to call their associated features.To the buttons, you can assign [Language] or any features displayed on the [All Services] screen.For how to assign features to the buttons, refer to “1 Before Using the Machine” > “Customizing the Control Panel” > “Assigning Features to <Custom> Buttons” in the Administrator Guide.

18 <All Services> button Press this button to display the [All Services] screen.You can change the features that appear on the [All Services] screen. For information, refer to “1 Before Using the Machine” > “Customizing the Control Panel” > “Customizing the [All Services] Screen” in the Administrator Guide.

19 One touch panels Contains one touch buttons.Turn over the panels to display buttons 001 - 030, 031- 060 and 061-070.Buttons M01 to M20 are for stored programs. The buttons corresponds to the stored jobs 01 to 20.Note • The feature is not available for some models. An optional package

is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

20 One touch buttons Allows you to specify a recipient with the simple press of a button. You can use the buttons for fax and Internet Fax jobs.The registered address numbers 001 to 070 can be specified with the buttons.Note • The feature is not available for some models. An optional package

is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.


47

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

Full Size Color UI (Optional)When you install the Full Size Color UI (optional), you can change the layout of the components displayed on the screen.The following describes the names and functions on the control panel.Note • As the Full Size Color UI does not support the One Touch Panels, you cannot specify

recipients with the One Touch Buttons.


1 Touch screen Displays messages required for operation and buttons for various features. You can directly touch the touch screen to instruct operations and set features.

2 <Custom> buttons Press this button to call the associated features.To the buttons, you can assign [Language] or any features displayed on the [All Services] screen.For how to assign features to the buttons, refer to “1 Before Using the Machine” > “Customizing the Control Panel” > “Assigning Features to <Custom> Buttons” in the Administrator Guide.

48

Control PanelProduct O

verview

2

3 <All Services> button Press this button to display the [All Services] screen.You can change the features that appear on the [All Services] screen. For information, refer to “1 Before Using the Machine” > “Customizing the Control Panel” > “Customizing the [All Services] Screen” in the Administrator Guide.

4 <Energy Saver> button If the machine is not operated for a while, the machine's power consumption is lowered to enter the Energy Saver mode. In the Energy Saver mode, this button lights up. To enter the Energy Saver mode, press this button. To cancel the Energy Saver mode, press this button again.

5 <Clear All> button Returns the settings you made to the default values. The machine returns to the same state as when it is powered on.

6 <Interrupt> button Press this button to suspend a copy or print job in progress to have the machine process another job. During the Interrupt mode, the <Interrupt> button lights up. Pressing the <Interrupt> button again exits the Interrupt mode and resumes the suspended job.

7 <Stop> button Press this button to stop the current copy job or communications.

8 <Start> button Press this button to start scanning a document.

9 Numeric keypad Use the numeric buttons on the keypad to enter the number of copies, passwords and other numerical values.

10 <Speed Dial> button Press this button to specify a recipient with an address number when sending a fax or e-mail.

11 <C (Clear)> button Press this button if you have entered a wrong numerical value with the numeric keypad.

12 <Dial Pause> button Used to insert a pause into a destination number.

13 <Log In/Out> button Press this button to display the User ID entry screen for logging into the System Administration mode, Authentication mode, or Account Administration mode. Press this button to log out as well.

14 <Machine Status> button Press this button to check the machine status and meters, to check the status of consumables, and to print reports.

15 <Review> button Press this button to open the [Review] screen. In this screen, you can check a list of the status of copy and scan features whose settings have changed from the defaults. You can also check the details of fax and e-mail recipients.

16 <Job Status> button Press this button to check or cancel the current job, to check or print saved documents, or to check completed jobs.

17 Brightness dial Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. Use this dial to enhance or decrease the contrast.

18 <Job in Memory> indicator Lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.

19 <Online> indicator Lights when the machine is sending or receiving data to or from a client.


49

2 Product Overview

Product Overview

2

Screens and Buttons DisplayedThe machine allows you to change the features and buttons displayed on the touch screen. The screens you can customize are as follows:

Screen displayed when the power is turned on

Screen displayed when the machine exited the Energy Saver mode

Screen displayed after Auto Reset

Assigning features to the <Custom> buttons

The [All Services] screenNote • The following screens and buttons may have been changed by the system administrator.

Use the machine according to the changes being made.

Setting the Initial ScreenYou can set the screen displayed after turning the machine on or exiting the Energy Saver mode.

Setting the Screen Displayed after Auto ClearYou can select from [Last Selection Screen] to [All Services] to be displayed after Auto Clear.

Assigning Features to the <Custom> ButtonsAssign features to the <Custom> buttons on the control panel: Custom 1 to Custom 3.By assigning frequently-used features to the <Custom> buttons, you can switch to the features without returning to the [All Services] screen. Note • By factory default, [Copy] is assigned to the <Copy> button, and no feature is assigned to

the <Custom2> and <Custom 3> button.

Customizing the [All Services] ScreenYou can customize the layout of features and buttons on the [All Services] screen that is displayed when you press the <All Services> button on the control panel.

Changing the [Feature] ScreenYou can customize the screen layouts for the following features listed on the [All Services] screen.

Copy

Fax / Internet Fax

E-mail

Scan to Mailbox

Scan to PCFor how to change the screens for copy feature, refer to “5 Tools” > “Copy Service Settings” > “Copy Tab - Features Allocation” in the Administrator Guide.For how to change the screens for fax feature, refer to “5 Tools” > “Fax Service Settings” > “Screen Defaults” in the Administrator Guide.For how to change the screens for scan feature, refer to “5 Tools” > “Scan Service Settings” > “First Tab” in the Administrator Guide.

50

Entering TextProduct O

verview

2

Entering Text

During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. This section describes how to enter text.

You can enter the following characters: numerals, letters, and symbols.

Item Description

Entering letters and numerals If you select [Shift], uppercase letters appear. To return to the lowercase letters, select [Shift] again.

Entering symbols Select [Symbol].Note • Depending on the keyboard, the [Symbol] button

may be displayed as [More Characters].

Entering a space Select [Space].

Deleting characters Select [Backspace]. You can delete one character at a time.

51

3 Copy

This chapter describes the basic copy procedures and the copy features provided by the machine.

Copying Procedure .....................................................................................54

Operations during Copying .........................................................................60

Copy ...........................................................................................................63

Image Quality..............................................................................................74

Layout Adjustment ......................................................................................79

Output Format.............................................................................................92

Job Assembly ...........................................................................................115

3 Copy

54

Copy

3

Copying Procedure

This section describes the basic copy procedures. The following shows the reference section for each procedure.

Step 1 Loading Documents .........................................................................................................54Step 2 Selecting Features ............................................................................................................56Step 3 Entering a Quantity ..........................................................................................................57Step 4 Starting the Copy Job.......................................................................................................58Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job Status ...........................................................................59

Step 1 Loading DocumentsThere are two methods for loading documents:

Document FeederSingle sheet

Multiple sheets

Document Glass

Single sheet

Bound documents, such as books

Document FeederThe document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 139.7 x 210 mm (A5, 5.5 x 8.5 inches) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.82).The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.

Important • To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or creased documents.• Two sided scanning of lightweight paper 38 - 49 g/m2 is not supported.

For information about copying mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.83).

Document Type (Weight) Number of Sheets

Lightweight paper (38 - 49 g/m2) 75 sheets

Plain paper (50 - 80 g/m2) 75 sheets

Heavyweight paper (81 - 128 g/m2) 50 sheets

Copying Procedure

55

Copy

3

1 Remove any paper clips and staples before loading the document.

2 Place the documents face up (when the documents are 2-sided, place the front side up) in the center of the document feeder.Note • The indicator lights up when the

document is loaded correctly. When the indicator is not lit, the document glass is detecting the documents. Press the <Clear (C)> button and load the documents again.

3 Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.

Document GlassThe document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).Important • After using the document glass, close the document cover.

The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.For information on entering document sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.82).The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Open the document cover.Important • Ensure that a screen is displayed on the

control panel, and then load a document. If a document is loaded before a screen is displayed, the machine may not properly detect the document size.

CAUTIONDo not apply excessive force to hold thick document on the platen glass. It may break the glass and cause injuries.

Indicator

3 Copy

56

Copy

3

2 Place the document face down, and align it against the top left corner of the document glass.

3 Close the document cover.Note • When a standard size document is placed

on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.

Step 2 Selecting FeaturesYou can select copy features under [Copy] on the [All Services] screen.Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the configuration of your machine.

• When the Authentication or Account Administration feature is used, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

1 Press the <All Services> button.

2 Select [Copy].

3 If the previous settings still remain, press the <Clear All> button.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<All Services> button

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Clear All> button

Copying Procedure

57

Copy

3

4 Select each tab, and configure features as necessary.

The following shows the reference section for each feature."Copy" (P.63)"Image Quality" (P.74)"Layout Adjustment" (P.79)"Output Format" (P.92)"Job Assembly" (P.115)

Step 3 Entering a QuantityYou can enter up to 999 for the number of copies.

1 Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad. The number of copies entered appears on the upper right of the touch screen.

2 If you enter an incorrect value, press the <C> button and then enter the correct value.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

Numeric keypad

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<C> button

3 Copy

58

Copy

3

Step 4 Starting the Copy JobThe following explains how to start a copy job.

1 Press the <Start> button.Important • If the document has been set in the

document feeder, do not hold down the document while it is being conveyed.

• Copies cannot be made if a copy protection code is detected.

Note • If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• You can set the next job during copying.

If you have more documentsIf you have more documents to copy, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a single set of data.

1 Select [Next Original] while scanning is in progress.Note • When using the document feeder, load

the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document.

• When the screen on the right is displayed and no operation is performed during a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.

• You can change the number of copies by selecting [Change Quantity...], which is displayed when you select [Next Original]

2 Load the next document.

3 Press the <Start> button.If you have more documents, repeat Steps 2 and 3.

4 When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Start> button

Copying Procedure

59

Copy

3

Step 5 Confirming the Copy Job in Job StatusThe following explains how to confirm the job status of a copy job.

1 Press the <Job Status> button.

2 Confirm the job status.

From the pull-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Job Status> button

3 Copy

60

Copy

3

Operations during Copying

This section describes available operations during copying. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Stopping the Copy Job ................................................................................................................60Changing the Number of Copies.................................................................................................61Interrupting the Copy Job ...........................................................................................................62

Stopping the Copy JobTo cancel the copy job in progress, follow the procedure below.

1 Press either [Stop] on the touch screen or the <Stop> button on the control panel.

2 Select [Cancel].

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Stop> button

Operations during Copying

61

Copy

3

If the screen shown in Step 2 does not appear even after you press the <Stop> button on the control panel:


2 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].

Changing the Number of CopiesDuring scanning or copying the document, you can change the number of copy sets.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Job Status> button

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Stop> button

3 Copy

62

Copy

3

2 Select [Change Quantity...].

3 Set the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad. The new quantity must include the number of copies that have already been printed. You cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already been printed.

4 Press the <Start> button.Note • If you enter the same value as the number of copies that have already been printed, the

machine will not execute a copy job even when you press the <Start> button.

Interrupting the Copy JobYou can temporarily stop the copy job to have the machine process another job.Important • Press the <Interrupt> button only after all the documents have been scanned. The machine

does not accept another job while it is scanning the documents, or [Next Original] is being selected.

1 Press the <Interrupt> button.Note • The interrupt indicator lights up to indicate

that the machine is in the interrupt mode.

2 Load a document and set features if necessary.

3 Set the number of copy sets with the numeric keypad.

4 Press the <Start> button.

5 After you have finished making the interrupt copy, press the <Interrupt> button.Note • The interrupt indicator goes out to indicate that the interrupt mode is exited.

• If you used the document glass to copy the document, remove the document from the document glass.

6 Press the <Start> button. The suspended copy job is resumed.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Interrupt> button

Copy

63

Copy

3

Copy

You can set the basic features on the [Copy] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)................................................................ 63Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying) ....................................................................... 67Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)........................................................................ 69Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) .......................................................................... 72Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ............................................................................ 73Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)............................................................ 73Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density) .......................................................................... 73

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [Copy].

2 Select a feature on the [Copy] screen.

Reduce/Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)This feature allows you to select a copy ratio to make enlarged or reduced copies.

1 Specify a copy ratio.

3 Copy

64

Copy

3

Copy ratio entry boxAllows you to enter a value between 25 and 400% in 1% increments, by touching the entry box and then using numeric keys, or by using the [ ] and [ ] buttons. When you make enlarged/reduced copies from standard sized documents on standard sized paper, the following copy ratios will be applied.

How to load document depends on the size and orientation of a document. For details, refer to "Step 1 Loading Documents" (P.54)".For paper that can be loaded, refer to "2 Paper and Other Media" > "Paper Types" in the Administrator Guide.

100%Copies at the same image size as the original document.

Auto %Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.Note • If you select [Auto %], select an option other than [Auto Paper Select] in [Paper Supply].

Ratios (3rd to 5th buttons)Displays preset copy ratios.You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Preset Buttons" in the Administrator Guide.

More...Displays the [Reduce/Enlarge] screen. Refer to "When [Proportional %] is Selected" (P.65), "When [Independent X - Y%] is Selected" (P.65), or "When [Calculator %] is Selected" (P.66).

A6 B6 A5 B5 A4 B4 A3

A6 100% 122% 141% 173% 200% 245% 283%

B6 82% 100% 116% 142% 164% 200% 232%

A5 71% 86% 100% 122% 141% 174% 200%

B5 58% 70% 81% 100% 115% 141% 163%

A4 50% 61% 70% 86% 100% 122% 141%

B4 41% 50% 58% 70% 81% 100% 115%

A3 35% 43% 50% 61% 70% 86% 100%

Copy

Original

Copy

65

Copy

3

When [Proportional %] is SelectedYou can select a ratio from standard copy ratios, or can enter a ratio directly.

1 Select a copy ratio, or specify a value.

Copy ratio entry boxTouch the entry box, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons to specify a ratio within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

100%Copies at the same image size as the original document.

Auto %Automatically determines the copy ratio based on the document size and the paper size specified in [Paper Supply], and copies the document to fit into the paper.Note • If you select [Auto %], options other than [Auto Paper] is specified in [Paper Supply].

Presets%Selects from the preset ratios.You can change the copy ratio associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy AllSlightly reduces the specified copy ratio to copy the complete image onto the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box.Important • If you select [Copy All] and you do not want to erase the edges of the document, set the

amount of edge erase to 0 mm. Note that if the amount is set to 0 mm, the edges of the copied document may get dirty or the image loss may occur.

When [Independent X - Y%] is SelectedAllows you to specify reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length separately.

1 Select any item.

Width - X%, Length -Y%Specifies reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments. Use the [ ] and [ ] buttons or the numeric keypad to specify a ratio.

3 Copy

66

Copy

3

Lock X - Y%Allows you to make the same ratio adjustment for the width and length at the same time.

100%/100%Copies at the same image size as the original document.

Auto X-Y%Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so that the document image fits in the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box.

Copy All X-Y%Automatically determines the reduction/enlargement ratios for the width and length so that the document image fits in the paper, and then slightly reduces the ratios so that the complete image is copied onto the paper. When this option is selected, a check mark is displayed in the box.

X:Width/Y:LengthAllows you to specify preset reduction/enlargement ratios.

When [Calculator %] is SelectedYou can specify values for the length and width individually.If you specify both the original document size and the desired copy size, the copy ratios for the length and width are calculated automatically within the range from 25 to 400% according to the values that you entered.Important • The [Calculator%] screen allows you to specify ratios. [Original Size] and [Copy Size] are the

items into which you enter to calculate ratios. The values entered into [Original Size] and [Copy Size] will not be reflected in a scan size for the document or paper size. Be sure to specify a scan size for the document. Also, specify a paper tray when necessary.

For details on how to set a scan size for the document, refer to "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)" (P.82)". For how to set a paper tray, refer to "Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)" (P.67)".

1 Enter the width of the original document into [Original Size] of [Width X%] using the numeric keypad.

2 Enter the width of the output copy into [Copy Size] of [Width X%] using the numeric keypad.

3 In the same way, enter the [Original Size] and [Copy Size] of [Length Y%].

Width X% / Length Y%Displays the ratios that are automatically calculated using the values entered in [Original Size] and [Copy Size].

Original SizeAllows you to enter the width and length of the original document, in the range of 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

Copy

67

Copy

3

Copy SizeAllows you to enter the width and length of output copies, in the range of 1 to 999 mm in 1 mm increments.

Paper Supply (Selecting the Paper for Copying)This feature allows you to select the tray that holds the paper you want to use.

1 Select a paper tray.

Auto Paper SelectAutomatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper, based on the document size and the specified copy ratio.Note • If you select [Auto Paper Select], specify an option other than [Auto %] in [Reduce/Enlarge].

Trays (2nd to 5th Buttons)Allows you to directly select the desired tray.You can change the paper tray associated with each button. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Defaults" > "Paper Supply" in the Administrator Guide.

More...Displays the [Paper Supply] screen.Refer to "[Paper Supply] Screen" (P.67)".

[Paper Supply] ScreenYou can select a paper tray from all trays available on the machine.

1 Select a paper tray.

TrayAllows you to select a paper tray. When [Auto Paper] is selected, the machine automatically determines the tray holding the appropriate paper based on the document size and the specified copy ratio. When [Bypass] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.68).

3 Copy

68

Copy

3

% FullDisplays the remaining amounts of paper loaded in trays.

Paper SizeDisplays paper sizes.

Paper TypeDisplays paper types.

Paper ColorDisplays paper colors.For how to set [Paper Color], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Paper Tray Attributes" in the Administrator Guide.

Size DetectionDisplays how the machine detects a paper size.For how to set [Size Detection], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Paper Tray Settings" > "Paper Tray Attributes" in the Administrator Guide.

[Tray 5] ScreenIf you want to use paper that cannot be loaded in Tray 1, 2, 3, or 4, use Tray 5 (Bypass).

1 Select a paper size and a paper type.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• [Auto Size Detect] is available only when

standard sized paper is loaded.

Paper SizeSelect from [Auto Size Detect], [Standard Size], and [Custom Size (Variable Size)].When you select [Auto Size Detect], the paper size is identified automatically.When you select [Standard Size] or [Custom Size (Variable Size)], refer to "When [Standard Size] is Selected" (P.69) or "When [Custom Size] is Selected" (P.69) respectively.

Paper TypeSelect a paper type.

Copy

69

Copy

3

When [Standard Size] is SelectedSelect a paper size from standard paper sizes, and then select a paper type.

1 Select a paper size and a paper type.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous


When [Custom Size] is SelectedSet the X (width) within the range from 100 to 483 mm, and the Y (height) within the range from 100 to 305 mm in 1 mm increments.Important • If the X (width) of non-standard size paper is less than 140 mm, documents may not be

printed properly.• When copying on both sides of non-standard size paper, specify the size within the range

from 140 to 432 mm for the X (horizontal) direction and from 140 to 297 mm for the Y (vertical) direction.

• When the C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed, paper of which X direction is less than 140 mm will be delivered to the center tray. Every now and then, remove the paper delivered to the center tray.

1 Enter a paper size using [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ].

2 Select a paper type.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous


Output Color (Selecting the Color for Copying)This feature allows you to select copy colors.Note • If output color restrictions are set, the available colors will be restricted. For information, refer

to "5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" > "Account Limit" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select a color mode.

3 Copy

70

Copy

3

Auto DetectThe machine automatically determines the colors of the original document and makes copies in full color if the original document is colored, and in single color (black) if the document is black-and-white.Note • If a color document is in one of the following conditions, the machine may copy the

document in black and white. - The colored area is too small.- The colors are too light.In that case, change a level from the five levels used by the machine when it recognizes color. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Image Quality Adjustment/Calibration" > "Image Quality" > "Output Color Recognition" in the Administrator Guide.

ColorCopies in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.

Black & WhiteCopies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.

Dual ColorCopies color documents using two colors.You can select colors. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Defaults" > "Dual Color - Source Color" and "Dual - Non-target Area Color" in the Administrator Guide.

Single ColorCopies color documents using one color.You can select the color. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Defaults" > "Single Color" in the Administrator Guide.

More...Displays the [Output Color] screen.

[Output Color] ScreenYou can make settings for full color, dual color, and single color.

1 Select [More...].

2 Select the desired output color mode.

Auto DetectAutomatically determines the color of the original document and makes copies in full color if the original document is colored, or in single color (black) if the document is black-and-white.

ColorCopies in full color using all the four colors of toner: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.

Black & WhiteCopies in black and white regardless of the colors in the original document.

Copy

71

Copy

3

Dual ColorSeparates the colors of your document into the source colors and the other colors, and then copies the document using two colors. Selecting [Dual Color] allows you to set the following:

Source ColorThe [Source Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Source Color] Screen" (P.71).

Target Area ColorThe [Target Area Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Target Area Color] Screen" (P.71).

Non-target Area ColorThe [Non-target Area Color] screen is displayed.

Refer to "[Non-target Area Color] Screen" (P.72).

Single ColorThe [Output Color - Color] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Output Color - Color] Screen" (P.72).

[Source Color] ScreenThis screen allows you to select one or more colors from your document to define them as source colors.

1 Select [Dual Color].

2 Select [Source Color].

3 Select [Other than Black] or [Color].

4 If you selected [Color] in Step 3, select the desired source colors.

Other than BlackThe colors other than black will be the source colors.

ColorAllows you to select one or more source colors from six preset options.

[Target Area Color] ScreenThis screen allows you to select the target color to be used in place of the selected source colors. Available options are seven preset and six custom options.For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom Colors" in the Administrator Guide.

3 Copy

72

Copy

3


2 Select [Target Area Color] copy service settings.

3 Select a color.

[Non-target Area Color] ScreenThis screen allows you to select the color to be used in place of the colors other than the selected source colors. You can select from seven preset and six custom options. For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom Colors" in the Administrator Guide.


2 Select [Non-target Area Color].

3 Select a color.

[Output Color - Color] ScreenThis screen allows you to specify the color to be used for single-color copying.Available options are six preset and six custom options.For information about how to set custom colors, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Custom Colors" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Single Color].

2 Select [Color].

3 Select a color.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)This feature is the same as [Original Type] of the [Image Quality] screen. Refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.74).

Copy

73

Copy

3

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)This feature is the same as [Copy Output] of the [Output Format] screen. Refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.112).

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)This feature is the same as [Multiple-Up] of the [Output Format] screen. Refer to "Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)" (P.98).

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting the Copy Density)This feature allows you to select a copy-density level from seven levels. The copy becomes darker when you move [ ] to the left, and lighter when you move it to the right.Note • [Lighten/Darken] of the [Copy] screen and [Lighten/Darken] of [Lighten/ Darken/Contrast] in

the [Image Quality] screen are the same.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to select from 7 density levels.

3 Copy

74

Copy

3

Image Quality

On the [Image Quality] screen, you can configure the image quality features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)...........................................................................74Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of Images)...........................75Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents / Adjusting Contrast) ......76Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)................................................................................77Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance) ..................................................................................78Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone) ......................................................................................78


2 Select the [Image Quality] tab, and then select a feature on the [Image Quality] screen.If the color reproduction is unsatisfactory, perform calibration. For information on the calibration, refer to "3 Maintenance" > "Executing Calibration" in the Administrator Guide.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)This feature allows you to select the type of documents, such as text and photos. By selecting a document type, you can make copies at optimum image quality.

1 Select [Original Type].

2 Select the original type.

AutoAutomatically sets the document type based on the setting made in [System Settings] and the setting made in [Output Color] on the [Copy] screen.

Photo & TextSelect this option when the document contains both text and photos. The machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas of the document and sets the appropriate image quality for each area. To process photo areas, select the photo type from [Printed Original], [Photograph], and [Photocopy].

Printed OriginalSelect this option when the document contains printed photos, such as a brochure.

PhotographSelect this option when the document contains pasted photos. This option prevents the copy from being reproduced bluish.

Image Quality

75

Copy

3

PhotocopySelect this option when the document is a copy or print made with a color copier such as this machine. This option prevents the copy from being reproduced faintly.

TextSelect to make copies of text documents. This option is also suitable for graphs and illustrations.

Normal TextSelect this option for printed documents, or for documents written with ink.

Light TextSelect this option for text that requires enhancement, such as handwritten pencil text.

See-Through PaperSelect this option to reduce blurs of tracing-paper documents or to suppress background shadows of lightweight documents.

Note • Whether [See-Through Paper] is displayed on the screen depends on the setting under [System Settings]. For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Original Type - See-Through Paper" in the Administrator Guide.

PhotoSelect to make copies of photos. Select the photo type from the same options as [Photo & Text]: Printed Original, Photograph, and Photocopy.

MapsSelect to make copies of documents that have text placed on color backgrounds, such as maps.

Image Options (Adjusting Copy Density / Sharpness / Saturation of Images)

This feature allows you to adjust the copy density, sharpness, and saturation levels. Note • [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] and [Lighten/Darken] of [Copy] are the same.

• If [Lighten/Darken], [Sharpness], or [Saturation] is set concurrently with [Color Effects], the setting made for [Color Effects] will be cleared.

1 Select [Image Options].

2 Adjust the copy density, sharpness, and saturation with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/DarkenAllows you to select from seven copy density levels between [Lighten] and [Darken].Moving the arrow mark to the upper position makes the copy density lighter, and moving to the lower position makes darker.

3 Copy

76

Copy

3

SharpnessAllows you to select from five sharpness levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen].Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting a lower cell makes softer.

SaturationAllows you to select from five saturation levels between [Vivid] and [Pastel].Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes colors brighter, and selecting a lower cell makes less bright.

Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents / Adjusting Contrast)

This feature allows you to suppress the background color of documents, such as newspaper and color paper. You can also adjust the contrast.Note • When [Original Type] is set to [Photo], the [Image Enhancement] feature does not work.

• If [Background Suppression] or [Contrast] is set, the setting made for [Color Effects] will be cleared.

1 Select [Image Enhancement].

2 Set [Image Enhancement] and [Contrast]. Adjust the contrast with [ ] and [ ].

Background SuppressionNo SuppressionScans document backgrounds with no filtering.

Auto SuppressionWhen [Output Color] is set to [Black], the background of a document printed on colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed.When [Output Color] is set to [Color], [Dual Color] or [Single Color], the background of a document printed on white-color paper will be suppressed.

Note • When [Output Color] is set to [Color], you can change the level of background suppression. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Background Suppression Level" in the Administrator Guide.

ContrastAuto CorrectionAutomatically adjusts the brightness and hue of the original document to sharpen the image.

Note • [Auto Correction] is not available when the Document Feeder is used.

Manual ContrastAllows you to select from the five levels between [More Contrast] and [Less Contrast].

Image Quality

77

Copy

3

Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker.In contrast, selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller.

Color Effects (Selecting an Image Quality)If you set this feature, the [Image Enhancement], [Image Options], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings are automatically adjusted and copies are made at the specified quality.Note • If other image-quality settings are made after you set [Color Effects], the Color Effects

setting will return to its default.

1 Select [Color Effects].

2 Select an image quality.

OffCopies with the [Image Enhancement], [Image Options], [Color Shift], and [Color Balance] settings at their defaults.

LivelyReproduces fresher, livelier images with increased color saturation.

BrightReproduces brighter images with enhanced contrast. This option is suitable for documents that are intended to attract people's attention, such as posters.

WarmReproduces brighter, warmer, more reddish images. This option is suitable when skin tones are to be reproduced more pinkish or when subdued images are to be reproduced more warmly.

CoolReproduces clearer blue colors. This option is suitable for water and sky images, and is also suitable when smoky blue colors are to be reproduced more clearly.

Shadow SuppressionSuppresses the colors on the reverse side of the original document from being reproduced in the copy.

3 Copy

78

Copy

3

Color Balance (Adjusting Color Balance)This feature allows you to adjust the Low, Medium, and High density levels of the four CMYK toner colors (cyan, magenta, yellow and black).Note • If [Color Balance] is set, the Color Effects setting will be cleared.

1 Select [Color Balance].

2 Select a color.

3 Use [ ] and [ ] to adjust the color balance for each density.

HighlightsAllows you to adjust the color strength of low-density areas.

MidtonesAllows you to adjust the color strength of medium-density areas.

ShadowsAllows you to adjust the color strength of high-density areas.

Color Shift (Adjusting the Color Tone)This feature allows you to adjust the tone of the colors to be reproduced in copies, by a maximum of two levels in two directions.On the screen, the [Before] slider represents the color tone of the original document, and the [After] slider represents the color tone of output copies. Selecting a button on the screen moves the [Before] slider to adjust the tone of the colors.When the [Before] slider is moved to the left, the Y (yellow) cell on the [Before] slider becomes closer to the R (red) cell on the [After] slider, and thus a yellow fruit appears more reddish and riper-looking. At the same time, the tone of all the other colors changes. The red color appears more magentish, and the green color appears more yellowish.Conversely, when the [Before] slider is moved to the right, the Y (yellow) cell on the [Before] slider becomes closer to the G (green) cell on the [After] slider, and thus a yellow fruit appears more greenish. At the same time, the tone of all the other colors changes. The magenta color appears more reddish, and the red color appears more yellowish.Note • Ensure that [Color] has been selected in [Output Color] on the [Copy] screen. The Color

Shift feature is not available when [Output Color] is set to [Black].• If [Color Shift] is set, the Color Effects setting will be cleared.

1 Select [Color Shift].

2 Select a button to adjust the color tone.

Layout Adjustment

79

Copy

3

Layout Adjustment

On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents.The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .................................................. 792 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages) ........................................... 80Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document) ...................................................... 82Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ........................ 83Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document) ........................................ 84Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)............................................................................... 85Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images) .............................................................. 87Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images) .................................................................. 89Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)................................. 892 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies) ................................................................................ 90


2 Select the [Layout Adjustment] tab, and then select a feature on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

Book Copying (Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)This feature allows you to copy facing pages of a document on separate sheets of paper in page order.It is useful if you need to make separate copies of facing pages of a bound document such as a booklet.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.• If you want the sheets to be output in the page order, set [Output Orientation] to [Face Down]

on the [Output Format] tab.

1 Select [Book Copying].

2 Select any item.

OffDoes not copy as a bound document.

Left Page then RightCopies the left page and then the right page of facing pages.

3 Copy

80

Copy

3

Right Page then LeftCopies the right page and then the left page of facing pages.

Top Page then BottomCopies the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages.

Both PagesCopies both pages in page order.

Left Page OnlyCopies the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page OnlyCopies the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page OnlyCopies the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page OnlyCopies the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Binding Edge EraseErases the shadow from the center section of the document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

2 Sided Book Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies of Facing Pages)You can assign pages when making copies of facing pages in a bound document so that pages face each other in the same way as the document. You can also specify the start page and the end page from the left and right of facing pages.Important • Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 Select [2 Sided Book Copying].

2 Select any item.

OffDisables this feature.

Left Page then RightScans the left page and then the right page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.

Layout Adjustment

81

Copy

3

Right Page then LeftScans the right page and then the left page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.

Top Page then BottomScans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages, to make 2-sided copies.

Starting & Ending PageDisplays the [Starting & Ending Page] screen.Refer to "[Starting & Ending Page] Screen" (P.81).


[Starting & Ending Page] ScreenYou can set the copy start page and end page.

1 Set [Starting Page] and [Ending Page].

Starting PageSelect the copy start page from the following items.

[Left Page] / [Right Page]You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

[Top Page] / [Bottom Page]You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Ending PageSelect the copy end page from the following items.

[Left Page] / [Right Page]You can select these items when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

[Top Page] / [Bottom Page]You can select these items when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

3 Copy

82

Copy

3

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Document)This feature allows you to set the scan size for a document.Use this feature when your document is a non-standard size, or when you want to copy your document at a size different from the original size.You can add margins, or delete unnecessary margins using this feature.

1 Select [Original Size].

2 Select the size of the document.If you select a non-standard size, specify values for the X and Y directions.

Auto DetectDetects the document size automatically. The document sizes that can be detected are as follows:

Note • If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

The document sizes that can be automatically detected depend on [Paper Size Settings] made in the System Administration mode. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Standard SizeSelect a document size from 17 options.You can change the sizes displayed on the screen. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.

Variable SizeEnter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when making copies at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a value in the range of 15 to 432 mm for the width (X), and a value in the range of 15 to 297 mm for the height (Y), in 1 mm increments. The scales attached on the upper and left edges of the document glass will help you specify values.Important • When the document is loaded on the document feeder, the base point in the Y (height)

direction is the center of the edge. If you specify 100 mm, the scan height will be from 50 mm above to 50 mm below the center of the document.

Document Feeder Document GlassAutodetectableDocument Sizes

B5, B5 , B4, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , 11 x 17", 16K , 8K

B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11" , 11 x 17", 16K, 16K , 8K

Layout Adjustment

83

Copy

3

Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)

When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents and make copies onto paper that matches the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper to make copies on, so that copies are made on the same size of paper.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the first sheet of the document and the [Original Orientation]

setting are the same.• Always load A5 documents in portrait orientation.• When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or

A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load B5 documents in portrait orientation.• If the top left corners of the documents are not aligned properly, the documents may not be

scanned correctly.• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5

portrait and B4 landscape. If another combination of document sizes is used, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be copied properly.

Note • The [Original Orientation] setting is based on the orientation of the first page of a document. Load the second and subsequent pages of the document in consideration of this setting.

1 Select [Mixed Sized Originals].

2 Select [On].

OffSelect this item when all documents are of the same size.

OnWhen documents of different sizes are copied, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Original OrientationAllows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine

may mistakenly detect the top of the document.

Upright ImagesSelect this item when placing the top edge of the document against the top side of the document glass or document feeder.

Sideways ImagesSelect this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder.

3 Copy

84

Copy

3

Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows of the Document)When you copy a document with the document cover open or when you copy a book, the edges and center margin of the document may be printed as black shadows. The Edge Erase feature allows you to erase such shadows.Note • For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides.

• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the ratio you configured.

For information on the areas that can actually be printed, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Printable Area" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Edge Erase].

2 Select any item.

NormalSets the Edge Erase amounts to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right edges.

All EdgesErases the shadows of the four edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [4 Edges] and [Center] individually.

Individual EdgesErases the shadows of the top, bottom, left, and right edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [Top], [Bottom], [Left], [Right], and [Center] individually.

Parallel EdgesErases the shadows of the top and bottom edges, and left and right edges of a document, and also the shadow in the center of the document if it is a bound document. You can specify values for [Top & Bottom], [Left & Right], and [Center] individually.

Erase ValueAllows you to specify Edge Erase values.

4 EdgesErases the shadows of the four edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Top & Bottom (Top/Bottom)Erases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left & Right (Left/Right)Erases the shadows of left and right edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Layout Adjustment

85

Copy

3

CenterErases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document. You can set the binding erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1mm increments.





Side 2Appears when [Edge Erase] is selected.Set whether the same value is set to the edge erase amount of Side 1 and Side 2.

Same as Side 1The same value is set to the edge erase amount of Side 1 and Side 2.

Mirror Side 1The edge erase amounts of Side 1 and Side 2 are set symmetrically.

Image Shift (Adjusting the Image Position)This feature allows you to shift the position of document images so that the images are placed on the left, right, top, bottom, or center of paper. You can also adjust the amounts of the left, right, top, and bottom margins. If you make 2-sided copies, you can adjust the image positions for [Side 1] and [Side 2] individually.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the

same.

Note • The settings made for the Image Shift feature are set in accordance with paper. They are not affected by the Reduce/Enlarge settings.

1 Select [Image Shift].

2 Select any item.

No ShiftDoes not shift the position of document images.

Auto CenterShifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.

3 Copy

86

Copy

3

Margin ShiftAllows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top & bottom, and left & right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Side 1Displays the [Image Shift - Side 1] screen.

Refer to "[Image Shift - Side 1] Screen" (P.86).

Side 2Displays the [Image Shift - Side 2] screen.

Refer to "[Image shift - Side 2] Screen" (P.87).

Mirror Side 1Select this item when you want the positioning of Side 2 to match the positioning of Side 1.





[Image Shift - Side 1] ScreenYou can make settings for Side 1.

1 Select any item.


Auto CenterShifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Layout Adjustment

87

Copy

3

Corner ShiftShifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can select from 8 shift directions.To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Margin ShiftAllows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

[Image shift - Side 2] ScreenYou can make settings for Side 2.

1 Select any item.


Auto CenterShifts document images so that they are placed in the center of paper.To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Corner ShiftShifts document images so that they are placed at an edge or corner of paper. You can select from 8 shift directions.To make fine adjustments, set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Margin ShiftAllows you to adjust margins. Set the amounts of the top and bottom, and left and right margins within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Image Rotation (Changing the Orientation of Images)If the orientation of the paper currently loaded in the tray differs from that of your document, the machine automatically rotates the document image to fit on the paper. You can also select a reference position for image rotation if documents are of mixed orientations.This feature is available only when copies are made using A4, 8.5 x 11", or smaller size paper.

3 Copy

88

Copy

3

1 Select [Image Rotation].

2 Select any item.

OffCopies documents as they are, even if they are orientated differently.

Always OnAutomatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches that of the paper.

On during AutoAutomatically rotates document images so that the orientation of the images matches that of the paper only when [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] or [Auto Paper] of [Paper Supply] is selected.

Rotation DirectionDisplays the [Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] screen.Refer to "[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] Screen" (P.88).

[Image Rotation - Rotation Direction] ScreenYou can set the reference position for rotation.

1 Select any item.

Staple PositionWhen the finisher is installed, [Staple Position] is displayed.If documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated to match the stapling edge specified in the settings of the Staple feature.

Portrait Original - Left EdgeIf documents are of mixed orientations, images will be rotated so that the top edge of landscape documents is aligned with the left edge of portrait documents.

Portrait Original - Right EdgeIf documents are of mixed orientations, the image will be rotated so that the top edge of landscape documents is aligned with the right edge of portrait documents.

Layout Adjustment

89

Copy

3

Invert Image (Making Reversed Copies of Images)This feature allows you to invert document images to make mirror and negative images.Note • When Output Color is set to [Black] or [Single Color], the black color on the document is

inverted to white, and the white color to black.• When Output Color is set to [Color], the colors are inverted to their complementary colors.• When [Negative Image] and [Edge Erase] are set simultaneously, the edge erase area turns

to white.

1 Select [Invert Image].

2 Select any item.

Mirror ImageCreates a mirror image of the document.

Negative ImageCreates a negative image of the document.

Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)This feature allows you to specify the orientation of a document to have the machine identify the top of the document.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine


1 Select [Original Orientation].

2 Select [Upright Images] or [Sideway Images] in accordance with the orientation of the document loaded.



3 Copy

90

Copy

3

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)Copies of 1-sided and 2-sided documents can be made on one side or both sides of a paper.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting are the

same.

1 Select [2-Sided Copying].

2 Select any item.

1 1 SidedMakes a copy of a 1-sided document on one side of paper.

1 2 SidedMakes a copy of a 1-sided document on both sides of paper.

2 2 SidedMakes a copy of a 2-sided document on both sides of paper.

2 1 SidedMakes a copy of a 2-sided document on one side of paper.

Originals

Head to HeadSelect this item when the front and back faces of the document are in the same orientation.

Head to ToeSelect this item when the front and back faces of the document are in opposite orientations.This item appears when [2 2 Sided] or [2 1 Sided] is selected.

CopiesHead to HeadSelect this item when you want the orientation of the front and back sides of the copy to be the same as that of the document.

Head to ToeSelect this item when you want the orientation of the first and second sides of the copy to be the opposite of that of the document.This appears when [1 2 Sided] or [2 2 Sided] is selected.

Original OrientationAllows you to specify the orientation of the document to have the machine identify the top of the document.

Layout Adjustment

91

Copy

3

Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.



3 Copy

92

Copy

3

Output Format

On the [Output Format] screen, you can configure features for outputting documents.The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet) .......................................................................................92Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies) .........................................................................................95Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)..................................97Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet) ............................................................98Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets).................................................99Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet) ...........................................................100Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies)....................................101Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies) ...................................107Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security).................................................................109Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper)......................................................................................111Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)..........................................1112 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies) ..............................................................................112Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options) ...........................................................................112ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)............................................................113


2 Select the [Output Format] tab, and then select a feature on the [Output Format] screen.

Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)This feature lays out pages so that booklets are formed when the output sheets are folded in half. You can also set the binding shift and attach a cover when making booklets.When the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed, you can also fold the output sheets in half, or staple the folded output sheets.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.

Note • As the machine copies four pages of the document onto one sheet of paper, if the number of pages in the booklet is not a multiple of four, the remaining pages will be output as blank pages.

Output Format

93

Copy

3

• If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Booklet Creation].

2 Select any item.


Create Left/Top Bound BookletCopies are made to enable left binding or top binding.

Create Right Bound BookletCopies are made to enable right binding.

Copy BookletYou can output the copies of scanned documents as they are by specifying Bi-fold/Stapling. Select this when you do not need a document to be copied in booklet page order.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.

CoversYou can attach covers to a booklet.

No CoversNo cover is added.

Blank CoversA blank sheet of paper is attached as the cover.

2 Sided CoversThe first and second pages of the document are copied on both sides of the cover.

1 Sided Covers - Print OutsideThe first page of the document is copied on the front side of the cover.

Last Page on Back CoverSelecting this check box copies the image of the last document page onto the last page of the copy sheets as a back cover. When you use [Divide Output] to divide a booklet into subsets, the image of the last document page will be copied onto the last page of the last subset.Note • Depending on the number of pages in the original, a blank page may be added before the

last booklet page.

Binding ShiftDisplays the [Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] screen.

3 Copy

94

Copy

3

Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] Screen" (P.94).

Divide OutputDisplays the [Booklet Creation-Divide Output] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Divide Output] Screen" (P.94).

Fold & StapleDisplays the [Booklet Creation - Fold & Staple Options] screen.Refer to "[Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple] Screen" (P.95).

Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Paper SupplyDisplays the [Booklet Creation - Paper Supply] screen.Select the tray to be used for body pages from [Main Body Tray], and the tray for cover pages from [Cover Tray]. The orientation and size of paper loaded in the trays must be the same.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.68).

[Booklet Creation-Binding Shift] ScreenYou can set the binding shift value within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] or numeric keypad to specify a binding shift value.

[Booklet Creation-Divide Output] ScreenWhen you have a large number of originals, the originals are divided to create subsets to reduce the thickness of each booklet. The machine folds copies in half, and piles them up to form a booklet. You can specify the number of sheets within the range of 1 - 50 in 1-sheet increments. Note • When specifying [Folding], set the dividing number of sheets in the range from 1 to 15.

1 Select [On].

2 Set the number of copies using [ ] and [ ] or with the numeric keypad.

Output Format

95

Copy

3

[Booklet Creation-Fold & Staple] ScreenWhen the C-Finisher with Booklet Maker (optional) is installed, [Bi-Fold] or [Bi-Fold + Stapling] becomes available.

1 Select any item.

No Fold & StapleNo Finishing is carried out.

Fold OnlyOutputs copies folded in half. The number of copies that can be folded is 5. When the number is more than 5, the document is divided by every 5 sheets.

Fold & StapleThe copies are folded in half and stapled at the center. The number of copies that can be treated is 2 to 15.

Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)This feature allows you to attach covers to copies.Different types of paper (such as colored paper and heavyweight paper) can be used as the front and back covers of copies.Important • When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the

maximum limit, the machine will not print the scan data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 1,500 pages for color copies and 6,000 pages for black-and-white copies when the documents are A4 (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents.

Note • When making 2-sided copies, copies are made on both sides of the top cover/back cover in accordance with the page order of the document.

• If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Covers].

2 Select any item.

3 Copy

96

Copy

3

Front CoverAttaches a front cover to the copies.

No CoversNo cover is added.

Blank CoversBlank sheets of paper are attached as front covers.

1 Sided Cover Side 1 OnlyThe first page of the document is copied on the front side of the front cover.

1 Sided Cover Side 2 OnlyThe first page of the document is copied on the back side of the front cover.

2 Sided CoverThe first and second pages of the document are copied on the front and back sides of the front cover.

Back CoverAttaches a back cover to the copies.

No CoversNo back cover is attached.

Blank CoversBlank sheets of paper are attached as back covers.

1 Sided Cover Side 1 OnlyThe first page of the document is copied on the front side of the back cover.

1 Sided Cover Side 2 OnlyThe first page of the document is copied on the back side of the back cover.

2 Sided CoverThe first and second pages of the document are copied on the front and back sides of the back cover.

Paper SupplyDisplays the [Covers - Paper Supply] screen.Allows you to set a tray. When you select trays for copying and make covers, the orientation and size of paper loaded in the trays must be the same.

Front Cover TraySet the tray used for front covers.

Back Cover TraySet the tray used for back covers.

Main Body TraySet the tray used for the body pages of documents.

When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.68).

Note • [Auto Size Detect] of [Tray 5] cannot be selected as [Covers Tray].

Output Format

97

Copy

3

Front Cover QuantityAllows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be used as front covers. This setting is displayed when [Blank Covers] is selected for [Front Cover].

Back Cover QuantityAllows you to specify the number of blank sheets to be used as back covers. This setting displayed when [Blank Covers] is selected for [Back Cover].

Transparency Options (Inserting Blank Sheets between Transparencies)This feature allows you to insert blank separators between output transparency sheets. At the same time, you can make copies for handouts.Important • Using transparency sheets for color (V556/V558 [with white border]) may cause a

malfunction or paper jam.

Note • When loading A4 size transparencies on Tray 5 (bypass), we recommend loading them vertically.

• Transparency sheets must be loaded in a tray in the same orientation as the paper to be used for handouts and separators.

1 Select [Transparency Options].

2 Select any item.

No Transparency SeparatorsDoes not insert separators.

Blank Transparency SeparatorsInserts a separator each time a transparency is used for copying. Only one set of copies can be made.

Blank Separators & HandoutsInserts a separator each time a transparency is used for copying. At the same time, the required number of copies is made for handouts.

Transparency Set & HandoutsMakes copies using transparencies. At the same time, the required number of copies is made for handouts.

Paper SupplyDisplays the [Paper Supply] screen. Select the tray to use.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.68).

3 Copy

98

Copy

3

Multiple-Up (Copying Multiple Pages onto One Sheet)2, 4, or 8 pages of a document can be copied together onto a single sheet of paper.When you select [Multiple-Up], [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is selected automatically. The machine automatically sets the copy ratio and makes copies of the images so that they fit on the selected paper.Important • Ensure that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • When [Auto %] of [Reduce/Enlarge] is cancelled (a new copy ratio is selected), image loss may occur depending on the size of the document image.

• When Image Shift is set, shift is executed on the whole document. For this reason, image loss at the edge of the original may occur depending on the size of the document image.

• When Edge Erase is set, it is carried out for each document page.• Select other than [Auto] for a tray to be selected for [Paper Supply] on the [Copy] screen. If

[Auto] is set for [Paper Supply], a tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is automatically selected. Change the setting as necessary. For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" > "Auto Paper Off" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Multiple-Up].

2 Select any item.


2 Pages UpCopies two document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.

4 Pages UpCopies four document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.

8 Pages UpCopies eight document pages onto one side of a single sheet of paper.

Reading OrderAllows you to select how to lay out images on a page.





Output Format

99

Copy

3

Poster (Making Enlarged Copies Spread over Multiple Sheets)An enlarged copy of a document can be made spread over multiple sheets.This feature allows you to create a large poster by pasting together the copies spread over multiple sheets. Copied sheets are provided with a paste margin so that they can be pasted together. The paste margin is fixed to 10 mm.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the


Note • This feature is not supported by the document feeder.

1 Select [Poster].

2 Select any item.

No PostersNo enlarged copies are made.

Output SizeYou can select paper sizes.

Enlargement %Refer to "When [Enlargement %] is Selected" (P.99).

Paper SupplyDisplays the [Paper Supply] screen.Select the paper tray to use.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. Refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.68).

When [Enlargement %] is SelectedYou can specify a different ratio for the height and width.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to specify the height and width ratios.

Width X/Length YSet the height and width ratios within the range from 100 to 400% in 1% increments.

Lock X - Y%You can simultaneously change the numerical values of the height and width by the same amount.

3 Copy

100

Copy

3

Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on One Sheet)This feature allows you to copy a document image on one sheet of paper repeatedly for a specified number of times.When the copy ratio is set to [Auto], the repeated copies of the image are reduced to fit on the selected paper. You can also specify how the repeated copies of the image are arranged.Note • When making copies at the same size as the document image, specify a number of repeats

so that the copies fit on the paper.• If [Auto Paper Select] is set for [Paper Supply], the tray specified in [Auto Paper Off] is

automatically selected. Change the settings if necessary. For information on [Auto Paper Off], refer to "5 Tools" > "Copy Service Settings" > "Copy Control" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Repeat Image].

2 Select any item.


Auto RepeatAutomatically determines the number of copies according to the document size, paper size, and copy ratio, and then repeatedly copies the document image onto the paper.Note • Copies cannot be made when the document image is larger than the specified paper size.

Variable RepeatSpecify how many copies to place along each of the long and short edges of paper. You can specify a value between 1 and 23 for the length in the Y direction and a value between 1 and 33 for the length in the X direction.

Image LayoutEvenly SpacedThe specified number of images are evenly arranged on the paper.

Side by SideThe specified number of images are arranged with no space on the paper.

Output Format

101

Copy

3

Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies)This feature allows you to add a comment, a date, and page numbers onto copies.You can select comment, date, and page-number styles, and their print positions.Important • When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the

maximum limit, the machine will not print the scanned data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 1,500 for color copies and 6,000 for black-and-white copies when the documents are A4 (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents.

Note • The Reduce/Enlarge feature does not affect the annotation image and text sizes.• If you specify [Stamp], [Date], and [Page Number] together, make sure that their print

positions do not overlap.• When the [Multiple-Up] feature is used, an annotation is added to each copy page.• When the [Repeat Image] or [Booklet Creation] feature is used, an annotation is added to

each copy image.

1 Select [Annotations].

2 Select any item.

CommentDisplays the [Comment] screen.Refer to "[Comment] Screen" (P.102).

Date StampDisplays the [Date Stamp] screen.Refer to "[Date Stamp] Screen" (P.102).

Page NumbersDisplays the [Page Numbers] screen.Refer to "[Page Numbers] Screen" (P.103).

Bates StampDisplays the [Bates Stamp] screen.Refer to "[Bates Stamp] Screen" (P.105).





3 Copy

102

Copy

3

[Comment] ScreenThis screen allows you to select a comment style and a comment position.

1 Select any item.

OffNo comment is added.

CommentA comment is added.

Stored CommentsYou can select comment text from eight options, or from user-defined text strings.For information on how to register text, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.

Apply ToDisplays the [Apply Comment To] screen.You can select whether to add a stamp onto the first copy page only, or onto each copy page.

PositionDisplays the [Comment - Position] screen.For side 1 of copy sheets, you can select a comment position from nine options.For side 2 of copy sheets, you can select [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1].

Format & StyleDisplays the [Comment - Format & Style] screen.You can select a comment size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 64 points in 1 point increments. You can also select a stamp color from seven options. Note • When setting [Date Stamp] and [Page Numbers] at the same time, [Black] is specified for the

color of comment.

[Date Stamp] ScreenThis screen allows you to add a date to copies. The date shows when you started copying the document.You can change the date format. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Date Format" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select any item.

OffNo date is added.

Output Format

103

Copy

3

Date StampA date is added.

Apply ToDisplays the [Apply Date Stamp To] screen.You can select whether to add a date onto the first copy page only, or onto each copy page.

PositionDisplays the [Date Stamp - Position] screen.For side 1 of copy sheets, you can select a date position from six options.For side 2 of copy sheets, you can select [Same as Side 1] or [Mirror Side 1].

Font SizeDisplays the [Date Stamp - Font Size] screen.You can select a date size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

[Page Numbers] ScreenThis screen allows you to select a page-number style.

1 Select any item.

OffNo page number is added.

Page NumbersAdds page numbers to copies.

Style1, 2, 3Adds page numbers only.

-1-, -2-, -3-Adds page numbers, and hyphens before and after each page number. (Example: -1-)

Page1, Page2, Page3Adds page numbers, and the text "Page" before each page number. (Example: Page1, Page2)

1/N, 2/N, 3/NAdds page numbers, and the total number of pages to the right of each page number. (Example: 1/50, 2/50)When [1/N, 2/N, 3/N] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used.

-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-Adds page numbers followed by the total number of pages, and hyphens before and after the numbers. (Example: -1/50-, -2/50-)When [-1/N-, -2/N-, -3/N-] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used.

3 Copy

104

Copy

3

Page 1/N, Page 2/N, Page 3/NAdds page numbers followed by the total number of pages, and the text "Page" before each page number.When [Page 1/N, Page 2/N, Page 3/N] is selected, the value specified in the [Total Page(N)] screen is used.

Total Pages (N)Displays the [Page Number - Total Pages (N)] screen.- Auto

Automatically calculates the total number of pages.- Enter Number

Allows you to manually specify the total number of pages in the range of 1 to 999.

Apply ToDisplays the [Apply Page Numbers To] screen.Refer to "[Apply Page Numbers To] Screen" (P.104).

PositionDisplays the [Page Numbers - Position] screen.You can select a page-number position from six options.You can also select a comment position on Side 2 from [Same as Side 1] and [Opposite to Side 1].

Font SizeDisplays the [Page Numbers - Font Size] screen.You can select a page-number size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

[Apply Page Numbers To] ScreenThis screen allows you to specify a page range to add page numbers.

1 Select any item.

All PagesAdds page numbers to all copy pages.

Starting Page NumberAllows you to specify the start page to add a page number, in the range of 1 to 999.Note • Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the start page number.

Ending Page NumberAllows you to specify the end page to add a page number, in the range of 1 to 999. The start page is fixed to "1".Note • Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the end page number.

Output Format

105

Copy

3

Starting & Ending Page NumbersAllows you to specify the start and end pages to add page numbers, in the range of 1 to 999. Note • Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the start and end page numbers.

Include Covers/SeparatorsAvailable when [All Pages] is selected. Place a check mark to include covers and separators.

Starting Number You can enter a value within the range from 1 to 999.Note • Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter a starting page number.

[Bates Stamp] ScreenThis screen allows you to select prefix text and to specify the number of digits to be used for page numbers.

1 Select any item.

OffAdds no prefix text or page number.

Bates StampAdds prefix text and page numbers to copies.

Stored PrefixesAllows you to use the screen keyboard to enter prefix text up to 16 characters.

Number of DigitsDisplays the [Bates Stamp - Number of Digits] screen.You can specify the number of digits to be used for page numbers, between 1 and 9 digits in 1 digit increments.

Apply ToDisplays the [Apply Bates Stamping To] screen.Refer to "[Apply Bates Stamp To] Screen" (P.106).

PositionDisplays the [Bates Stamping - Position] screen.You can select a prefix and page-number position from six options.You can also select a stamp position on Side 2 from [Same as Side 1] or [Opposite to Side 1].

3 Copy

106

Copy

3

Font SizeDisplays the [Bates Stamping - Font Size] screen.You can select a prefix and page-number size from three options, or can directly specify a size in the range of 6 to 24 points in 1 point increments.

[Apply Bates Stamp To] ScreenThis screen allows you to specify a page range to add prefix text and page numbers.

1 Select any item.

All PagesAdds prefix text and page numbers to all pages.

Starting Page NumberAllows you to specify the start page to add prefix text and a page number, in the range of 1 to 999.Note • Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the start page number.

Ending Page NumberAllows you to specify the end page to add prefix text and a page number, in the range of 1 to 999. The start page is fixed to "1".Note • Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the end page number.

Starting & Ending Page NumbersAllows you to specify the start and end pages to add prefix text and page numbers, in the range of 1 to 999. Note • Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the start and end page numbers.

Include Covers/SeparatorsAvailable when [All Pages] is selected. To also include covers and separators, place a check mark.

Starting NumberYou can enter a value within the range from 1 to 999999999 when [Number of Digits] is not set, and can enter a value of up to the specified number of digits when [Number of Digits] is set. Important • If the page number exceeds the specified value (1 to 999999999 when [Number of

Digits] is not set) during copying, the copy job will be canceled.Note • Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the end page number.

Output Format

107

Copy

3

Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies)You can faintly print a sequential control number in the background of each copy page.If you set 1 as the starting number, 1 is printed on each page of the first copy set and 2 is printed on each page of the second set.To prevent, for instance, the duplication of confidential documents that are to be distributed at a conference, you can use this feature to add sequential numbers to the copies, and associate the numbers with the conference members.Important • When you select this feature, if the number of pages scanned by the machine exceeds the

maximum limit, the machine will not print the scan data. In that case, follow the message displayed on the screen to cancel the job. The maximum number of pages that the machine can scan is 999 pages per job. For multiple jobs, the maximum number of pages is 1,500 pages for color copies and 6,000 pages for black-and-white copies when the documents are A4 (Xerox standard size). These values are approximate and may vary depending on the paper type, size, and orientation of the original documents.


1 Select [Watermark].

2 Select any item.

Control NumberOffNo control number is printed.

OnA control number is printed. Enter the starting number of the control number. You can set a control number within the range from 1 to 999. Use [ ] and [ ], or the numeric keypad and enter the value.

Stored WatermarksDisplays the [Stored Watermarks] screen.Refer to "[Stored Watermarks] Screen" (P.108).

User Account NumberWhen using User Administration or Account Administration, a user account number is printed. However, if a user is not authenticated, nothing will be printed.Note • [User Account Number] is the No. (User Administration Number) registered by users in

Account Administration.• This screen is displayed when the Account Administration feature is enabled. If the

Authentication and Account Administration feature is used, [User Account Number] is displayed even when no data is collected. In this case, even if [On] is selected for [User Account Number], the No. registered by users (User Administration Number) is not printed.

Date & TimeYou can print the date and time that the copy job started.For information about the format for the date, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Date Format" in the Administrator Guide.

Serial NumberThe serial number of the machine is printed.

3 Copy

108

Copy

3





Watermark EffectDisplays the [Watermark Effect] screen.Refer to "[Watermark Effect] Screen" (P.108).Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


[Stored Watermarks] ScreenSelect the text to print on the copy.

1 Select [On].

2 Select any text.

OffNo text is printed.

OnText is printed. You can select the text used for watermark. You can specify text from 3 preset texts or the text set in the System Administration mode.For information on how to register text, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.

[Watermark Effect] ScreenYou can set Text Effect on this screen.If you enable the Text Effect feature, the text strings specified in [Control Number], [Text], [User Account Number], [Date & Time], and [Serial Number] on the [Watermark] screen are embedded in the background of each copy. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background is printed as embossed or outline text depending on the option you select on the [Watermark - Text Effect] screen.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


Output Format

109

Copy

3

1 Select any item.

OffDisables the feature, and prints text as it is.

EmbossedEnables the feature. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background of the copy is printed as embossed text.

OutlineEnables the feature. When the copy is copied again, the text embedded in the background of the copy is printed as outline text.You can also set the character size, density, and other watermark print settings in the System Administration mode. For information about other advanced settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" in the Administrator Guide.

Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security)Secure Watermark is a security management feature to embed a copy protection digital code into a document, to restrict the document to be duplicated. With the digital code, you can also analyze "when", "from which machine", and "by whom" the document was output.Important • This feature is only supported on Fuji Xerox manufactured machines that are compatible to

Secure Watermark.• Document copy protection that is set using the Secure Watermark feature is not warranted

to always function. The feature may not function depending on the document or setting conditions. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• Note that we assume no responsibility for a damage caused by using or being not able to use the Secure Watermark feature.

• By using the Secure Watermark feature, print quality may deteriorate as follows:- Colors may become darker.- Text in documents may become hard to read.- Dots such as decimal characters and periods may become hard to read.

• The Secure Watermark feature may not work properly for a document if its size is smaller than A5, if its background color is not white, or if the Watermark or Secure Watermark feature has already used for the document.

• In some cases, a document may not be printed even if the Secure Watermark feature has not been used for the document. This happens because the machine incorrectly detects a copy protection code from the document. In that case, ask the system administrator to temporarily disable the detection feature for copy protection codes.


• To analyze digital codes, an optional application, ApeosWare Secure Watermark Analyzer, is required. For information on how to use ApeosWare Secure Watermark Analyzer, refer to its documentation.

3 Copy

110

Copy

3

1 Select [Secure Watermark].

2 Select any item.

OffDoes not manage document security.

OnManages document security. Select any feature button if necessary.

Protection Code

OffDoes not prevent document duplication. A digital code is embedded into copies.

Prevent DuplicationPrevents document duplication. Any documents with a copy protection code cannot be copied.

Important • This setting also affects scan operation.

Stored Secure WatermarksDisplays the [Stored Secure Watermarks] screen.Refer to "[Stored Secure Watermarks] Screen" (P.110).

[Stored Secure Watermarks] ScreenYou can embed hidden text into documents.With this hidden text feature, the specified text is embedded in the entire sheet. When making a copy of a document that has been copied with this hidden text feature, the embedded text on the output appears in white regardless of whether or not the Secure Watermark kit is installed.

1 Select any item.

OffDoes not print hidden text.

OnPrints hidden text.You can select any text from the three preset text, or from text registered in the System Settings.For information on how to register text, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Watermark" > "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" in the Administrator Guide.



Output Format

111

Copy

3



Folding (Outputting Bi-Folded Paper)This feature allows you to fold copies in half, or crease in half.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.• The supported paper orientation is only . Select the tray whose orientation is set to .

1 Select [Folding].

2 Select any item.

No FoldingDoes not fold the copies.

Single FoldFolds copies in half.

Preset Repeat Image (Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet)This feature allows you to repeatedly copy one original onto equally divided areas according to the specified number of copies.Note • When anything other than [Auto %] is selected for [Reduce/Enlarge], image loss may occur

depending on the image size.

1 Select [Preset Repeat Image].

2 Select any item.


2 Pages UpMakes two copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.

4 Pages UpMakes four copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.

8 Pages UpMakes eight copies of the document image on a single sheet of paper.

3 Copy

112

Copy

3

2 Sided Copying (Making 2 Sided Copies)This feature is the same as [2 Sided Copying] of the [Layout Adjustment] screen. Refer to "2 Sided Copying (Making 2 sided Copies)" (P.90).

Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)This feature allows you to select finishing options.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


If a finisher is installed, each set of copies can be stapled, and then output. When the C-Finisher or C-Finisher with Booklet Maker is installed, copies can be punched.

1 Select [Copy Output].

2 Select any item.

AutoCopies are collated when any of the following features is used: auto document feeder, 2 Sided Book Copy, Covers, [Blank Separators & Handouts] or [Transparency Set & Handouts] of Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation, Stapling, Build Job, Sample Set, and Combine Original Sets.

Collated/Staple/Hole PunchThe machine outputs sheets sorted into sets that are arranged in page order.

UncollatedThe machine outputs the specified number of copies and sorts sheets by page.

Uncollated with SeparatorsThe machine outputs copies with inserting blank sheets as a separator and sorts sheets by page.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5 (Bypass)] is displayed. For details, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.68)".

StapleSets the position for stapling. The number of sheets that can be stapled is 2 - 50 (when 80 g/m2 paper is used). Available paper types are: plain paper, recycled paper, reload paper, heavyweight (99 - 169 g/m2), heavyweight reload, extra heavyweight (170 - 220 g/m2), gloss (99 - 169 g/m2), gloss reload, punched paper, and custom paper 1 to 5.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.• In the following cases, the actual stapling position is different from the stapling position

appearing on the screen:When [Original Orientation] is set to [Upright Images], and [Stapling] is set to one position at the right side. When [Original Orientation] is set to [Sideways Images], and [Stapling] is set to one position at the left side.

Output Format

113

Copy

3

Hole PunchSets the position for punching. The positions for punching vary based on a finisher installed.Important • Confirm that the orientation of the document and the [Original Orientation] setting of the

[Layout Adjustment] screen are the same.• When the punching feature of a finisher is defective, paper is delivered to the center tray

instead of the finisher tray. Remove the paper delivered to the center tray every now and then.




Sideways ImagesSelect this item when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or document feeder. When you place a document in the head to left orientation, be sure to select [Sideways Images].

Output Destination/OffsetAllows you to select an output destination.Note • This function may not appear depending on the model of the machine, and optional

equipment is required for use. For more information, contact your local Fuji Xerox representative.

ID Card Copying (Copying Both Sides of an ID Card)This feature allows you to copy both sides of a small undetectable original, such as an ID card, onto one side of paper.

1 Place a document against the top left edge of the document glass, and close the cover.Important • Use the document glass when copying.

The document feeder is not available for this feature.

• Specify the original’s orientation correctly.• Place the card slightly away from the top-

left corner of the document glass so that the whole image can be captured.

For the document orientations, refer to "Original Orientation (Specifying the Orientation of Loaded Documents)" (P.89)".

2 Select [ID Card Copying].

3 Select [On].

OffDisables ID card copying.

3 Copy

114

Copy

3

OnEnables ID card copying.

Job Assembly

115

Copy

3

Job Assembly

On the [Job Assembly] screen, you can configure features such as Build Job and Sample Set. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job) ................... 115Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)........................................................ 119Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals).............................................................................. 120Delete Outside/Delete Inside (Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area) .................... 121Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job) .............................................. 123


2 Select the [Job Assembly] tab, and then select a feature on the [Job Assembly] screen.

Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job)

This feature allows you to apply different copy settings to each document page or each document stack, and then outputs the copies as one job.

1 Select [Build Job].

2 Select [On].

3 Select the desired print settings.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous


Build Job OffBuild Job is not applied.

Build Job OnBuild Job is applied. The feature buttons appear. Set any item if necessary.Important • The features set here cannot be canceled or changed while the machine performs a copy

job.For features available in Build Job, refer to "Features that can be set in Build Job" (P.115).

Features that can be set in Build Job

Copy OutputFor information on the feature, refer to "Copy Output (Specifying Finishing Options)" (P.112).

3 Copy

116

Copy

3

Booklet CreationFor information on the feature, refer to "Booklet Creation (Creating a Booklet)" (P.92).

CoversImportant • The machine does not copy on a cover when using the Build Job feature.For information on the feature, refer to "Covers (Attaching Covers to Copies)" (P.95).

AnnotationsFor information on the feature, refer to "Annotations (Adding a Comment / a Date / Page Numbers to Copies)" (P.101).

Segment SeparatorsFor information on the feature, refer to "[Segment Separators] Screen" (P.117).

WatermarkFor information about the feature, refer to "Watermark (Printing Control Numbers on the Background of Copies)" (P.107).

Secure WatermarkFor information about the feature, refer to "Secure Watermark (Managing Document Security)" (P.109).

[Copy Job] screenThe following describes the screen that appears while the Build Job is being executed.

Change Settings...Displays the [Copy] screen allowing you to change the settings. After changing the settings as necessary, press the <Start> button on the control panel to start scanning of the document. If you want to return to the previous screen, press the < # > button.When using a stored program for Build JobWhile the machine makes copies using the Build Job feature, you can use a stored program.1) Select [Change Settings...].2) Select the [Job Assembly] tab.3) Select [Stored Programming].4) Select the number of the stored program that contains the features you wish to use.Note • You can only select numbers that have been registered.For information on how to register a stored program, refer to "Registering Stored Programs for Build Job" (P.265).

Chapter Start...Displays the [Build Job - Chapter Start] screen.Refer to "[Build Job - Chapter Start] Screen" (P.118).

Job Assembly

117

Copy

3

Insert Separators...Displays the [Segment Separators] screen.Refer to "[Segment Separators] Screen" (P.117).

Change Quantity...Displays the [Build Job - Change Quantity] screen. Enter a new quantity using the numeric keypad.

CancelThe document data stored by the Build Job feature is cleared and the job is cancelled.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <C (Clear)> or <Clear All> button on the

control panel.• While scanning the loaded document, [Stop] is displayed. Select [Stop] to pause scanning.

Select [Start] in the touch screen, or press the <Start> button on the control panel to resume scanning.

Last OriginalSelect this to end scanning of documents. The build job starts.

Next OriginalSelect this when you have another document. This item is selected when using the Build Job feature.

StartWhen loading the next document and select [Start], the next documents are scanned.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Sample JobWhen making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished output and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the confirmation.

[Segment Separators] ScreenYou can insert a sheet of paper as a separator in between each stack of documents. You can specify the number of separators to insert within the range of 1 to 99 as necessary. Note • You can specify different settings for each stack of documents. If you do not specify

particular settings for each stack of documents, the previously specified settings are applied.

1 Select any item.

2 Select [ ]/[ ] or use the numeric keypad to enter the number of separators to insert.

No SeparatorsThe machine does not insert any separators.

Blank SeparatorsThe machine inserts blank separators.Select this feature, load documents, and press the <Start> button. The blank separators are inserted.

3 Copy

118

Copy

3

1 Sided Separators Side 1 OnlyA first page of the loaded documents is copied on the front side of a separator, and the rest of pages are copied on the paper other than a separator.When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, or 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto the front page of a separator. When loading a single sheet document, the document is copied onto a separator.

1 Sided Separators Side 2 OnlyA first page of the loaded documents is copied on the back side of a separator, and the rest of pages are copied on the paper other than a separator.When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto the back side of a separator.When loading a single sheet document, the document is copied onto a separator.

2 Sided SeparatorsFirst two pages of the loaded documents are copied onto each side of a separator, and the rest of pages starting from the third page are copied onto the paper other than a separator.When using [Multiple-Up], the number of pages (2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages) that you selected to copy onto one side of a single sheet, starting from the first page of the loaded documents, are copied onto each side of a separator.When loading two-sheet documents, both sheets are copied onto each side of a separator.Note • When you have two separate documents, a single sheet document and multiple sheet

documents, if you want to copy this single sheet document and the first page of the multiple sheet documents onto each side of a separator, when loading the multiple sheet documents, select [No Separator] under [Build Job - Separators]. If you do not select [No Separator], the machine processes these two documents separately under different separator settings, the single-sheet document is copied onto a separator, and the first page (or first two page) of the multiple sheet documents is copied onto another separator.

Segment Separator TrayYou can select the tray, which is loaded with paper to be used as a separator.When [Bypass...] is selected, the [Tray 5] screen appears. For more information, refer to "[Tray 5] Screen" (P.68).

Separator QuantityWhen you select [Blank Separators], the number of separators can be set from 1 to 99.

[Build Job - Chapter Start] ScreenYou can set the chapter start.

1 Select any item.

OffThe next stack of documents is copied after the previous stack.

OnThe next stack of documents is copied from Side 1 of a new sheet of paper.

Job Assembly

119

Copy

3

Multiple-Up - New PageWhen [Multiple-Up] is marked, even if all documents are divided for every chapter before all of them are assembled in [Multiple-Up] feature, the next stack of document is copied using new sheets of paper.

Sample Job (Checking the Finished Output of the Copy)When making multiple sets of copies, you can print a sample set to check the finished output and then print the remaining copy sets. You can select to continue or cancel the job after the confirmation. The number of sets to be copied can also be changed. The sample copy is included in the total number of sets.Note • After a sample set is output, the remaining sets will automatically be output if the machine is

left uninstructed for the period specified under [Auto Job Release]. For details on [Auto Job Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" > "Auto Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Sample Job].

2 Select [On].

Sample Job OffNo sample set is made.

Sample Job OnA sample set is made.

[Copy Job] screenThe machine pauses and displays the [Copy Job] screen after the sample set is copied.

Change Settings...The [Change Settings...] screen is displayed. Uncheck the settings you want to cancel.

Change Quantity...The [Change Quantity] screen appears and you can change the number of copies entered before. Enter a new quantity using the numeric keypad. The new value must include the number of the sample set that has already been printed. When reducing the quantity, you cannot enter a number less than the number of copies that have already been printed.Note • If you specify "1" for [Change Quantity] and then press the <Start> button, the machine will

not process the job.

3 Copy

120

Copy

3

CancelThe remaining copies are cancelled.

StartThe remaining copies are made.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Combine Original Sets (Adding Originals)Use this feature when you copy a document that has too many pages to be loaded into the document feeder at one time, or when you scan each document page using the document glass and have the machine process the pages as one job.[Next Original] that is usually displayed while scanning documents with the document feeder is always selected in this mode. In addition, when using the document glass to scan documents, [Next Original] is also selected during scanning. If [Copy Output] is set to [Auto], the output is automatically sorted.When all documents have been scanned, select [Last Original].Note • After the first original set is copied, the screen will automatically return to the previous

display if the machine is left unused for the period specified under [Auto Clear]. For details on [Auto Job Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" > "Auto Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Combine Original Sets].

2 Select [On].


OnEnables this feature.





Job Assembly

121

Copy

3

[Copy Job] screenThe [Copy Job] screen is displayed when copying begins.

CancelThe document data stored by [Combine Original Sets] is cleared and the copying is cancelled.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <C> button or <Clear All> button on the

control panel.

Last OriginalSelect this to end scanning documents.

Next OriginalSelect this when you have more documents to copy. This button is activated when the [Combine Original Sets] feature is used.

StartLoad the next document, and select [Start] to start scanning.Note • The same operation is performed if you press the <Start> button on the control panel.

Delete Outside/Delete Inside(Deleting Outside or Inside of the Selected Area)

This feature allows you specify the area to be deleted from a document image. 3 areas can be specified.

1 Select [Delete Outside/Delete Inside].

2 Select any item.

OffNo area is deleted.

Delete OutsideDeletes the outside of the selected area.

Delete InsideDeletes the inside of the selected area.

3 Copy

122

Copy

3

Area SettingsDisplays the [Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] screen. You can set up to 3 areas.Refer to "[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] Screen" (P.122).

OriginalsWhen the original document is a 2-sided document, specify from which side the specified area is to be deleted.

Both SidesApplies the settings to both sides of the document.

Side 1 OnlyApplies the settings to side 1 of the document.

Side 2 OnlyApplies the settings to side 2 of the document.





[Delete Outside/Delete Inside - Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)] ScreenSet the area to be deleted. The area is defined by the rectangle formed between the points X1,Y1 and X2,Y2. The origin point is the top-right corner of a document.You can specify a value within the range of 0 to 432 mm for the width (X) and the length (Y) in 1 mm increments.Note • Specify the 2 coordinates from the top right corner of the document.

• When specifying multiple areas, the specified areas can overlap each other.• When [Reduce/Enlarge] is enabled, the specified area will be reduced/enlarged accordingly.

1 Select [Area 1], [Area 2], or [Area 3].

2 Enter the value for X1 into [X1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save].

3 Enter the value for Y1 into [Y1] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save].

4 Enter the value for X2 into [X2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save].

5 Enter the value for Y2 into [Y2] using the numeric keypad, and select [Save].Note • If all of [X1], [Y1], [X2], and [Y2] are set to [0], the area will be invalid. If no other area is

specified, the Delete Outside/Delete Inside feature cannot be used.• If you select <C> button, the value is cleared.

Job Assembly

123

Copy

3

Clear Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3)Clears all the values set for Area 1 (Area 2 or Area 3).

Stored Programming (Calling a Stored Program for Build Job)This feature allows you to call a stored program for build job.For information on this feature, refer to "Calling a Stored Program for Build Job" (P.269)".

4 Fax

This chapter describes the basic fax procedures and the fax features provided by the machine.

Fax Procedure ..........................................................................................126

Operations during Faxing .........................................................................132

About Internet Fax ....................................................................................134

About Server Fax......................................................................................141

Fax/Internet Fax........................................................................................143

Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................153

Fax/Internet Fax Options ..........................................................................157

More Options ............................................................................................173

Broadcast..................................................................................................178

Receiving Faxes .......................................................................................187

Facsimile Information Services.................................................................189Note • The fax features are not available for some models. An optional package is

necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.• LINE 2 (line 2) and LINE 4 (line 4) are optional.

Fax

4

4 Fax

126

Fax Procedure

This section describes the basic fax operations. The following shows the fax flow and reference sections.

Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................126Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................128Step 3 Specifying Destinations .................................................................................................129Step 4 Starting the Fax Job .......................................................................................................130Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job Status ............................................................................131



Multiple sheets

Document Glass

Single sheet


Document FeederThe document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 139.7 x 210 mm (A5, 5.5 x 8.5 inches) to 297 x 600 mm (long) (A3, 11 x 17 inches).The document feeder automatically detects documents of standard-size widths.Note • The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size

Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide

The sizes on the left are detected as the sizes shown on the right.8-inch width document B5 width document

10-inch width document B4 width documentThe document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.

Important • Place folded or creased documents on the document glass to avoid paper jams.• 2-sided scanning of lightweight paper (38 - 48 g/m2) is not supported.

For information on faxing mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.154).





Fax Procedure

127

Fax

4


2 Place the document (the front side of 2-sided document) face up in the center of the document feeder.Note • The indicator lights when the document is

loaded correctly. If the indicator does not light up, the machine may be trying to detect a document on the document glass. Press the <C> button, and then reload the document.

3 Adjust the movable document guides to just touch the edges of the document loaded.

Document GlassThe document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17").Important • After using the document glass, close the document cover.

The document glass automatically detects standard size documents.Note • The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size

Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide




3 Close the document cover.Note • When a standard size document is placed

on the document glass, the size of the document is displayed in the message area.


Indicator

Fax

4

4 Fax

128

Step 2 Selecting FeaturesYou can select the Fax or Internet Fax feature, or the Server Fax feature on the [All Services] screen.Important • The fax and Internet Fax features are not available while the Server Fax feature is enabled.

Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the model of your machine.• When the Authentication or Account Administration feature is used, a user ID and passcode

may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.


2 Select [Fax/Internet Fax].


4 Select each tab, and configure features as necessary.When you press the <Energy Saver> button while configuring the features, you can select whether to use the feature that skips 2-sided blank pages. For details, refer to "2 Sided (Skip Blank Pages)" (P.150)".

The following shows the reference section for each tab."Layout Adjustment" (P.153)"Fax/Internet Fax Options" (P.157)"More Options" (P.173)

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Clear All> button

Fax Procedure

129

Fax

4

Step 3 Specifying DestinationsThree methods are available to specify recipients: by phone number, by address number, and by group dial number. The following shows input methods supported by each method.

O: Available X: Not availableImportant • When using the Server Fax feature, you cannot specify address numbers using the numeric

keypad or use one-touch buttons.

Note • When the Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, you can specify up to 999 address numbers.

You can specify multiple recipients (Broadcast Send) using the above methods. You can also use a combination of the methods.If the same recipient was specified for several pending documents, you can send the documents with a single phone call. This feature is referred to as Batch Send. Note that you cannot use Batch Send with Broadcast Send, Relay Broadcast, Remote Mailbox, and Delay Start when prior to the specified time. When using a redial, resend, or delayed start send transmission job, or authentication feature, to send to the same address from different users, then Batch Send is not possible.Important • Confirm the recipient before sending a fax.For information on Broadcast Send, "Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients)" (P.178).

This section describes how to enter a phone number with the numeric keypad.

1 Enter a fax number using the numeric keypad.

2 To specify multiple recipients, select [+ Add] on the touch screen.Note • If you enter an incorrect value, press the

<C> button and enter the correct value.• Depending on the settings, a screen to re-

enter the recipient may be displayed after you specify the recipient and then select [+ Add] on the touch screen. In such case, re-enter the recipient.

Numeric Keypad One Touch buttons Address Book

Phone Number O X X

Address Number(Speed Dialing)

3 digits (001 to 500)

3 digits (001 to 070) From the list tab and index2 digits + ∗ (nn0 to nn9)

∗∗∗ (All address numbers)

Group Dial Number # + 2 digits X O

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

Numeric keypad

Fax

4

4 Fax

130

For information on specifying a fax number using the address book, refer to "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.145).For information on specifying a fax number using the speed dialing, refer to "Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number)" (P.146).For information on specifying a fax number using one touch buttons, refer to "Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button" (P.147).For information on the Internet Fax, refer to "About Internet Fax" (P.134).

Step 4 Starting the Fax JobThe following explains the procedure to start a fax job.



• Fax cannot be sent if a copy protection code is detected.

Note • Depending on the settings, the screen to re-enter the recipient may be displayed after pressing the <Start> button. In this case, re-enter the recipient.

• If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• You can set the next job during faxing.

If you have more documentsIf you have more documents to fax, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to send the documents as one set of data.

2 While documents are being scanned, select [Next Original].

Note • When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document.

• When the above screen is displayed and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.

• You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting [Resolution], [Scan Size] and [Lighten/Darken] displayed after selecting [Next Original].


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Start> button

Fax Procedure

131

Fax

4

4 Press the <Start> button.If you have more documents, repeat Steps 3 and 4.


Step 5 Confirming the Fax Job in Job StatusThe following explains the procedure to confirm the status of the faxed job.



From the pull-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

If undelivered documents existYou can confirm undelivered documents in the [Job Status] screen or [Job Status/Activity Report] screen.For information on how to send or delete undelivered documents, refer to "Undelivered Faxes" (P.301).

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Job Status> button

Fax

4

4 Fax

132

Operations during Faxing

The following describes the available operations during faxing. The following shows thereference section for each feature.

Stopping the Fax Job.................................................................................................................132Changing the Scan Settings.......................................................................................................133

Stopping the Fax JobTo cancel scanning a fax document, follow the procedure below.


2 Select [Delete].

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Stop> button

Operations during Faxing

133

Fax

4



2 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Cancel].

Changing the Scan SettingsYou can change the scan settings while scanning the document.

1 Select [Next Original].

2 Set [Resolution], [Original Size], and [Lighten/Darken].

For each setting, refer to "Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)" (P.151), "Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original)" (P.153), or "Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density)" (P.149).


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Job Status> button

Fax

4

4 Fax

134

About Internet Fax

Unlike general fax communications using public phone lines, Internet Fax uses corporate intranets and the Internet to send or receive scan documents as e-mail attachments.Because Internet Fax uses existing corporate intranets and the Internet, the transmission is less expensive than general fax transmission. By using a fax gateway, the machine can also communicate with fax machines that do not support the Internet Fax feature.Note • This feature is not available for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is

necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.For information on how to connect the machine to a network and configure the network environment, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" in the Administrator Guide, and the manual contained in the CD-ROM on the Driver CD Kit.

Internet Fax OverviewThe following describes the Internet Fax features of the machine.

Sending Internet FaxThe Internet Fax feature allows you to send documents scanned by the machine as TIFF-format attachments to Internet Fax-compatible machines.Important • The TIFF file profiles that can be processed differ depending on the Internet Fax-compatible

machine of the recipient. Confirm the profile that can be processed by the recipient's Internet Fax-compatible machine before specifying a profile. For more information, refer to "Sending Internet Fax" (P.136)". For profiles, refer to "Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles)" (P.170).

• If a document is sent to a computer using the Internet Fax feature, it cannot be opened in some cases. When you send a document to a computer, therefore, using the Scan-to-E-mail feature is recommended.

Using Direct Internet Fax featureAn Internet Fax can be sent directly to the Internet Fax-compatible machines without going through the SMTP server. You can switch between Internet Fax and Direct Internet Fax in the System Administration mode. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Internet Fax Control" > "Internet Fax Path" in the Administrator Guide.

Registering e-mail addresses in address numbersOnce you register a recipient's e-mail address in an address number, you do not need to enter the e-mail address each time you send Internet Fax to the recipient.Note • To address numbers, you can also register the Internet Fax profile and other settings

required for transmission. For information on how to register e-mail addresses, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Using the Broadcast Send featureAn Internet Fax can be sent to multiple destinations by specifying multiple e-mail addresses. Also, you can mix normal fax recipients and Internet Fax recipients to send a broadcast transmission for fax and Internet Fax.For information on how to specify recipients, refer to "Step 3 Specifying Destinations" (P.129) and "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.145).

About Internet Fax

135

Fax

4

Forwarding documents stored in mailboxesBy enabling the forwarding feature and registering a forwarding e-mail address for a mailbox beforehand, the fax documents stored in the mailbox are automatically forwarded to the specified computer. The user, therefore, does not need to walk up to the machine to pick up the fax documents.For more information, refer to "Forwarding Documents Stored in a Mailbox" (P.140).

Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay stationBy specifying mail addresses in a specific format, you can send faxes from the machine on the network via an Internet Fax-compatible machine (fax gateway) to fax machines that do not support the Internet Fax feature.Important • This feature is available only when the e-mail reception method on the fax gateway is set to

SMTP.For more information, refer to "Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station" (P.139).

Precautions when sending Internet FaxThe message "Doc. Sent" displayed on the [Job Status] screen of the machine, the Job History Report, and the Transmission Report indicates that the transmission to the SMTP server configured on the machine has been successful. The Internet Fax transmission to the recipient may not complete if there is a problem on the Internet. In such case, the machine will not be notified of such transmission error. After sending an important e-mail, we suggest you to confirm it is received, such as by calling the recipient.Note • You can receive a transmission result e-mail if you set Read Receipts (MDN)/Delivery

Receipts (DSN) when transmitting. For more information, refer to "Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results)" (P.157).

Receiving Internet Fax (Printing Internet Fax)The machine automatically prints Internet Fax documents that are sent by e-mail from an Internet Fax-compatible machine.Note • The following TIFF file format and profiles are available for e-mail reception.

File format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301) Profile: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, and TIFF-C. If an unsupported profile is received, the machine may not be able to print the file. For more information, refer to "Receiving Internet Fax" (P.137).

Restrictions on the E-mail ServerDepending on the system environment, such as restrictions on the e-mail server, large-size e-mails cannot be sent or received. Before you set the data-split feature, therefore, check the system environments of the sending and receiving ends.If data is split into multiple data but each data size is still too large, change the image quality or resolution of each data to make its size even smaller.

Fax

4

4 Fax

136

Features Unavailable for Sending Internet FaxThe following features are available for regular fax transmission, but are not available for Internet Fax transmission.

If you are using the fax gateway feature, you can set the communication mode and F code. For more information on the fax gateway feature, refer to "Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay station" (P.139).

Sending Internet FaxThe following explains the procedure to send Internet Fax.Important • The CC, BCC, and Reply To features are not available for Internet Fax.

Note • The machine converts documents to the TIFF format and then sends them as e-mail attachments.

1 Select [Internet Fax].

2 Select [New Recipients].

3 Specify a recipient by entering up to 128 characters with the keyboard displayed in the touch screen.Important • If you specify a fax number, the data will

not be sent.

Note • You can use address numbers, one touch buttons, group dial numbers, or Address Book to specify e-mail addresses. For more information, refer to "Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number)" (P.146), "Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button" (P.147), and "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.145).

4 Enter a subject and a message if necessary.

Screen Features

Fax/Internet Fax Options Starting Rate

Priority Send

Delay Start

Cover Page

Recipient Print Sets

F Code

Remote Mailbox

More Options Remote Polling

About Internet Fax

137

Fax

4

For entering the subject, refer to "Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject)" (P.164). For entering the contents, refer to "Internet Fax Message (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents)" (P.164).Note • If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen

appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel the job. Choose one of the processes.

• If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted.

• If TIFF-J is specified for the profile, the recipient's computer may not be able to display the attached TIFF file properly. In this case, specify the TIFF-S or TIFF-F profile.

• If the destination machine is not the same model as this machine, it may not print data received from this machine. Check if the destination machine supports the Internet Fax feature before you send data to it.

Receiving Internet Fax

Reception methodWhen the machine receives e-mail from an Internet Fax-compatible machine, the received document is printed automatically. No specific operations are needed to receive e-mail.The machine also accepts e-mails addressed to mailboxes on the machine, such as "[email protected]".For information on the mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide. For the job flow sheets, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • If domains for receiving e-mail are restricted by CentreWare Internet Services, you will only receive Internet Fax from the permitted domains. For information about the domain filter, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings" > "Domain Filtering" in the Administrator Guide.

• You can confirm the domain setting status in the [Domain Filter List]. For more information, refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Print Reports" in the Administrator Guide.

Printing sizeInternet Fax documents received on the machine are printed at the same size as the original documents of the senders.Note • When [TIFF-S] is selected for the profile, the printing size will be A4.

When the loaded paper is not the same size as the sent document or when the paper tray used for printing received documents is restricted, the receiving process will be the same as that for regular faxes.

Receiving e-mailEach e-mail header and attachment (TIFF file) of received e-mail will be printed.

Split documents sent by e-mailIf a document scanned by the machine is split into segments according to the [Max. No. of Pages for Split Send] setting made with CentreWare Internet Services, each segment will be treated as individual e-mail and attached with the details of split data.

Attachments (TIFF format)If an unsupported attachment file is received, the file is deleted. You can confirm the error in the Job History Report.

When the mailbox number is not registered

Fax

4

4 Fax

138

If the specified mailbox is not registered, the received data is deleted. You can confirm the cause of the problem in the Job History Report.

Mailbox operationsIf the machine runs out of hard disk space while printing e-mail or storing e-mail to the mailbox, the page being processed will be deleted at the point in time when the machine runs out of hard disk space.

Restricting incoming e-mailThe machine can be configured to accept or reject e-mails received from specified domains. This feature is known as the "Domain Filter". You can register up to 50 domains as permitted or rejected domains.When receiving an e-mail, the machine check the Domain Filter settings. If the domain is registered as the domain to be rejected, the machine will not receive the e-mail. You can confirm the result in the [Job History Report]. The job history of any rejected mail is not stored.For information about the domain filter, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Outgoing/Incoming E-mail Settings" > "Domain Filtering" in the Administrator Guide.

Useful Features

Using an E-mail Address to Send Internet Fax to a MailboxBy specifying the e-mail address of a mailbox on this machine, you can send Internet Fax from an Internet Fax-compatible machine to the mailbox.When Internet Fax data is received, the machine stores it in the target mailbox and prints a Mailbox Report.This feature is available only if the recipient’s machine can receive e-mail via SMTP. To use this feature, the recipient’s machine must have a mailbox that does not have a passcode. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.


2 Select any item.

3 Enter the e-mail address of the target mailbox in the following format.

B O X 1 2 3 @ m y h o s t . e x a m p l e . c o m

Example Mailbox number............................................ 123 (Enter the digits of the mailbox number to match those of the recipient)

Host name of the receiving machine............ myhostDomain name of the receiving machine....... example.com

BOX (fixed characters to indicate mailbox) + mailbox number

@ + host name of the receiving machine

Domain name of the receiving machine

About Internet Fax

139

Fax

4

Important • If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted.

Note • If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel the job. Choose one of the processes.

Sending an Internet Fax to normal fax machines via a relay stationBy specifying e-mail addresses in a specific format, you can send a document to regular fax machines (that do not support the Internet Fax feature) via a network.With this feature, the machine first sends a document to an Internet Fax-compatible machine (fax gateway) by e-mail via the Internet. The e-mail document is then converted to a fax document on the Internet Fax-compatible machine, and is forwarded to its destinations. The fax transmission costs can be reduced by locating the fax gateway and fax machines within an area where the same local rate applies.Important • This feature is available only when the e-mail reception method on the fax gateway is set to

SMTP.

Note • The e-mail received by the fax gateway is deleted even if the fax was not correctly sent.• The setting configured in [Communication Mode] of the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen is

used as the communication mode from the fax gateway to the destination fax machine.• Fax forwarding can be restricted by setting [Fax Transfer from Address Book] and [Fax

Transfer Maximum Data Size] in the System Settings.


2 Select any item.

3 Enter the e-mail address of the target mailbox in the following format.

FAX= 0312345678 /T33S=123 @myhost. example.com

Example Fax number .................................................. 0312345678F code (if necessary).................................... /T33S=123Host name of the receiving machine ............myhostDomain name of the receiving machine ....... example.com

Important • If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during Internet Fax transmission, the transmission is cancelled and the document data is deleted.

Note • If the hard disk of the machine becomes full during scanning of a document, a screen appears to prompt you to select whether to send the job up to the stored pages or to cancel the job. Choose one of the processes.

FAX= (fixed characters)

Fax number of the recipient

/T33S= (fixed characters) and F code (if necessary)

@ + host name of the machine that converts and sends the received e-mail as a fax.

Domain name

Fax

4

4 Fax

140

Forwarding Documents Stored in a MailboxThe following describes the feature to automatically forward fax documents stored in a mailbox, as e-mail attachment.Fax documents sent to mailboxes using the fax signal method (proprietary communication procedures), F Code method or DTMF method, and fax documents stored in mailboxes by the Box Selector feature can be forwarded as e-mail attachments.Important • This feature can only be used when the mail receiving protocol is SMTP.For information on the mailbox forwarding settings, sending to mailboxes, using the Box Selector to receive documents in a mailbox, and printing or deleting documents received in a mailbox, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.243)".For how to set the Mailbox Selector feature, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Received Options" in the Administrator Guide.

Forwarding Internet FaxThe machine can automatically forward fax documents received in a mailbox or fax documents stored in a mailbox by using the Box Selector feature to the forwarding address specified for the mailbox as e-mail.With this forwarding feature, you can receive Internet Fax documents on your computer without having to walk up to the machine to pick them up. You can also save paper by displaying the documents on your computer screen.

How to forward Internet FaxThe following operations are required for using the forwarding feature of Internet Fax.

On the machine sending a faxSending faxes to the mailbox using the fax signal method (proprietary communication procedure), F Code method or DTMF method.

For information on the transmission method, refer to "More Options" (P.173).

On the machine receiving the fax in a mailbox and forwarding an Internet FaxCreating a job flow sheet to specify a forwarding address and then making a link between the job flow sheet and the mailbox.

For information on registering a job flow, refer to "Job Flow Sheets" (P.255).

Important • Do not set the address of the machine as the forwarding address.

Note • You can register up to 100 locations.• [Mailbox Number] and [Passcode] are required by the sender. Inform the sender of the

settings.• If the fax you received is a JBIG-compressed image, and if the Internet Fax profile of the

forwarding destination is set to TIFF-F, the image is converted into MH format when forwarding. Also, if the Internet Fax profile is TIFF-S, the fax image is forwarded as is without changing the size and resolution settings.

• If the hard disk in the machine becomes full while receiving an Internet Fax, the reception is cancelled and the partly received file is deleted.

• If there is a problem with the data during Internet Fax forwarding, the forwarding is cancelled and the received document is saved to the mailbox.

• If forwarding using SMTP fails, the received document is stored in the mailbox.• You can confirm the forwarding result in the [Job History Report].

About Server Fax

141

Fax

4

About Server Fax

If your machine supports the scan feature, installing the Server Fax Kit (optional) allows you to use the Fax feature of a Server Fax server.When your machine does not support the Fax feature and supports the Server Fax feature only, the Server Fax feature will be enabled automatically.When your machine supports both the Fax and Server Fax features, manually switch to the Server Fax feature in System Settings of the System Administration mode.With this Server Fax feature, you can transfer image data received by the machine to the Server Fax server and can transfer image data received by the Server Fax server to the machine via a network based on the settings you made.The Server Fax feature supports the SMB, FTP, and SMTP protocols.For information on how to connect the machine to a network and set the network environment, refer to the Administrator Guide and the manual on the Driver CD Kit CD-ROM.Important • While the Server Fax feature is enabled, the Fax feature is detected as "not installed" even if

a Fax Kit is installed on the machine. During that time, therefore, fax transmission and reception are disabled and printed reports show that the machine does not support the Fax feature.

Note • The Server Fax service cannot be used together with the Fax service or the Internet Fax service.

• This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

Sending Server Fax

1 Select [Fax] on the [All Services] screen.

2 Use the keyboard to directly enter a destination, or use Address Book to specify a destination. For information on how to use the keyboard, refer to "Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen" (P.147).For information on how to use Address Book, refer to "Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book" (P.145).Important • When the Server Fax feature is used for fax transmission, the attributes other than [Fax

Number], [Recipient Name], and [Index] are ignored in Address Book.

Fax

4

4 Fax

142

Features Unavailable for Sending Server FaxThe following features are available for regular faxes, but are not available for server faxes.

* When the SMB or FTP protocol is used, the available options are [Standard] and [Fine], and the resolution of data that is sent to a final destination depends on the resolution setting on the fax server. When the SMTP protocol is used, the available option is [Fine] only.

The following settings of the Server Fax feature use the values specified under Tools > System Settings > Scan Mode Settings > Scan Defaults.

Background Suppression

Lighten/Darken

Sharpness

Features Available for Sending Server Fax (When SMTP is Used)When the SMTP protocol is used, the Server Fax feature is compliant with the E-mail settings configured under System Settings. The following E-mail settings, however, are not available for the Server Fax feature: [Read Receipts] and [Reply To].

Screen Features

Fax Resolution*

Transmission Options Priority Send

Cover Page

Recipient Print Sets

Remote Mailbox

F Code

More Options Remote Polling

Store for Polling

On-hook

Fax/Internet Fax

143

Fax

4

Fax/Internet Fax

You can specify recipients in [Fax/Internet Fax]. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax) ......................................................................... 143+ Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients)........................................................................ 144Specifying a Destination Using the Address Book .................................................................. 145Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number) .................................... 146Specifying a Destination using a One Touch Button ............................................................... 147Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard Screen .............................................................. 147Specifying a Destination using the Redial Feature .................................................................. 148Entering Specific Symbols ....................................................................................................... 148Removing/Confirming a Recipient .......................................................................................... 149Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density)................................................................................. 1492 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals) ................................................................. 150Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) ........................................................................ 151Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution) ................................................................... 151

1 Select [Fax/Internet Fax] on the [All Services] screen.

2 Select a feature on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen.

Internet Fax/Fax (Selecting Internet Fax/Fax)You can switch between Internet Fax and Fax as necessary.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


1 Select [Fax] or [Internet Fax] from the pull-down menu.

Fax

4

4 Fax

144

+ Add (Sending Faxes to Multiple Recipients)The Broadcast Send feature allows you to transmit the same document to multiple recipients with a single operation. There is no need to repeat the same operation for each recipient.When an Additional G3 Port Kit (optional) is installed, you can use the extra lines to make multiple transmissions simultaneously with Broadcast Send.If you specify Broadcast Send, the machine prints a relay broadcast report/multi-poll report after the Broadcast Send operation finishes.Note • For Fax and Internet Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one

time is as follows:Using the numeric keypad only: 200 locations; using address numbers only: 500 locations; and using both the numeric keypad and address numbers: 699 locations.For Server Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is 50.

• When the Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using address numbers only: 999 locations; and using both the numeric keypad and address numbers: 1198 locations.For Server Fax, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is 50.

• The one touch buttons correspond to address numbers 001 - 070.• When using Broadcast Send, [Cover Page] and [Remote Mailbox] are invalid even if they

are selected on the control panel. If you want to use [Cover Page] and [Remote Mailbox], set them when registering each recipient in address numbers.

• You cannot specify [Confirmation Options].

Show Fax No. / E-mail AddressWhen you check the [Show Fax No. / E-mail Address] check box, the recipient’s name will not be displayed in the recipient field.

Enable BroadcastTo prevent missending a fax to multiple recipients, you can set whether to use Broadcast Send prior to specifying multiple recipients. Check the [Enable Broadcast] check box to specify multiple recipients.[Enable Broadcast] is displayed when [Enabled] is set for [Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab]. For more information on the setting, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select the first recipient.

2 Select [+ Add].Note • Depending on the settings, the screen to

re-enter the recipient may be displayed after specifying the recipient and then selecting [+ Add] on the touch screen. In that case, re-enter the recipient.

3 Select the next recipient.

4 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3.


6 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to start transmission.

Fax/Internet Fax

145

Fax

4

Specifying a Destination Using the Address BookThis section describes how to use the address book to specify recipients.The address book shows the fax numbers registered to the address numbers.For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.Important • When the Server Fax feature is used for fax transmission, the attributes other than [Fax

Number], [Recipient Name], and [Index] are ignored in Address Book.

1 Select [Address Book].

2 From the pull-down menu of [Address Books] on the [Fax Address Book] screen, select [List all public entries], [Retrieve fax entries using index], [List all group entries], or [Search Network] to search fax numbers.If you want to specify multiple recipients, specify the recipients one after another.

3 Select items you want to specify for a recipient, and select [Save]. Note • If you uncheck the check box of a recipient, the recipient will be deleted from the displayed

list. You can also delete recipients by selecting the <C> button.

4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as necessary.

Using the Address BookYou can search for the fax numbers of recipients using List All Public Entries, Retrieve Fax Entries Using, List All Group Entries, and Search Network.You can set the starting numbers of address numbers in the System Administration mode. For how to change the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Screen Defaults" > "Address Book Speed Dial Default" in the Administrator Guide.

List All Public EntriesDisplays the list of registered recipients.Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. Select items you want to set for a recipient, and select [+ Add].

Retrieve Fax Entries Using IndexAllows you to search for the fax numbers of recipients using texts and numbers specified when registering address numbers.

List All Group EntriesAllows you to search for the pre-registered group dial numbers.Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen. Select items that you want to specify for a recipient, and select [Setup].For more information on how to register groups dial numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Fax Group Recipients" in the Administrator Guide.

Search NetworkAllows you to search for fax numbers not in the local address book but the one registered in a server on a network. Set any items for [Name], [Fax Number], [Custom Item], and select [Search Now]. Select items you want to specify for a recipient, and select [+ Add].

Fax

4

4 Fax

146

DetailsSelect an item of which details you want to check, and select [Details].

Chain DialAllows you to combine the fax numbers registered in one touch button, speed dial, and address book respectively and the numbers entered using the Numeric Keypad to specify as one recipient. You do not use the [Next Recipient] button.

Show Fax No. / E-mailWhen you check this box, the names of recipients will not be displayed in the recipient fields

Speed Dialing (Specifying a Destination Using an Address Number)You can use address numbers to specify recipients. Register the address numbers for speed dialing beforehand.You can use a wildcard ("∗" character on the numeric keypad or [∗] on the keyboard screen) to specify multiple recipients.

Enter the first two digits to specify address numbersFor example, enter "10∗" to specify 10 numbers from 100 to 109.

Specify all the address numbersEnter "∗∗∗" to specify all the address numbers.

When you specify address numbers, confirm that the corresponding fax numbers registered in the machine are correct. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.Note • You cannot specify two wildcard characters such as 1∗∗, ∗1∗, or ∗∗1.

• The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows:Dialing with address numbers: 500 locations. Using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 699 locations.

• When Address Book Extension Kit is installed, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows:Dialing with address number: 999 locations. Using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 1198 locations.

1 Press the <Speed Dial> button and enter a 3-digit address number, Repeat this procedure for each additional recipient. 1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Speed Dial> button

Fax/Internet Fax

147

Fax

4

Specifying a Destination using a One Touch ButtonYou can use the one touch buttons to specify recipients. One touch buttons correspond to the address numbers from 001 to 070. For example, when the number you want to dial is registered to the address number 001, press one touch button 001.For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • .The Full Size Color UI (optional) is not supported.

1 Press a one touch button. Confirm that the recipient (fax number) specified with the one touch button is displayed on the touch screen.Important • When pressing a one touch button, turn

over the one touch panel completely, and take off your hand from the panel. If you press a button as you turn over the panel, address numbers may not be specified correctly.

• Do not place any objects near the one touch buttons, nor spill any liquid over them.

Note • To specify multiple recipients, press the one touch buttons continuously.• Turn the one touch button panel over to press the one touch buttons 031 and above.

Specifying a Destination using the Keyboard ScreenYou can specify recipients using the keyboard screen.When the Additional G3 Port Kit (optional) is installed, you can set the line (port) and send faxes. Local terminal information can be registered to each line. You can use each line for a different purpose.Important • When transmission to a certain recipient is being prohibited in the System Administration

mode, the [Keyboard] buttons cannot be used.For details on local terminal Information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Local Terminal Information" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [New Recipients].

2 Specify a recipient with no more than 128 characters using the keyboard that appears on the touch screen.

Note • When the Server Fax feature is used, a destination must be less than 50 characters long. The available characters are as follows:

0 to 9 Numeric characters- Pause

# A starting character for a group number

\ A delimiter for private data. Using this character before and after private data hides the destination string.

S A character for password verification: DTMF signal

= A character to wait for dial tones

+ Available, but ignored

001 002 003

004 005 006

007 008 009

010 011 012

013 014 015

016 017 018

019 020 021

022 023 024

025 026 027

028 029 030

One touch button

Fax

4

4 Fax

148

(Space) Available, but ignoredFor more Information, refer to the documentation provided with Server Fax Kit.

3 Press the <Start> button.Note • The port numbers are "1", line 2 (LINE 2 jack) "2" and line 4 (LINE 4 jack) "4".

• You can specify line 2 and line 4 when an option is installed.

Specifying a Destination using the Redial FeatureYou can specify recipients using the Redial feature.

1 Select [Redial List...].

2 Select items you want to specify for a recipient, and select [Close].


Entering Specific SymbolsWhen specifying a recipient, you can use the following features to enter specific symbols from the touch screen.

Feature Button Function Input method

Enter pause - or <Pause> (-)

One pause is 3 seconds.You can enter pauses of 6 seconds, 9 seconds, etc. by additional button presses.

Press the <Pause> button.(Example)0-123 ...0--123 ...

Transmit using a password

S When a password has been set, transmission will only start if the password matches the ID number on the remote terminal.

1. Select [New Recipients] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen to display the keyboard.

2. Select [S].(Example)0312345678S12345678

Transmit DTMF signal

! Use to transmit the DTMF signal.

1. Select [New Recipients] in the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen to display the keyboard.

2. Select [More Characters].

3. Select [!].(Example)0311123456!123#

Transmit PB (from dial pulse to tone)

: Switches the dial type from pulse to tone when the Fax service is used.

1. Select [Tone (:)] on the [On-hook] or [Off-hook] screen.

Fax/Internet Fax

149

Fax

4

Note • When using the DTMF method, use specific symbols. For information on the DTMF method, "Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox)" (P.166), and "Broadcast" (P.178).

Removing/Confirming a RecipientYou can remove or confirm recipients using the pop-up menu.

1 Select the recipient to be removed or confirmed from [Address/Recipient].

2 Select any item from the pop-up menu.

RemoveRemoves the recipient.

Edit...The [Details] screen is displayed. You can confirm recipients or address numbers.

Close MenuHides the pop-up menu.

[Details] ScreenAllows you to confirm recipients.

Starting RateAllows you to select a communication mode according to the features of a recipient.

Lighten/Darken (Adjusting Fax Density)You can adjust fax density from seven levels.

1 Use [ ] and [ ] to select a density level.

Fax

4

4 Fax

150

2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)This feature enables you to scan and then transmit both sides of a document automatically.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.• The image on the back side of a document is rotated so that it is placed in the same

orientation as the image on the front side.

1 Select a scan option.

1 SidedSelect this option to scan one side of the document.

2 Sided (Head to Head)Select this option to scan both sides of the document (Head to Head).

2 Sided (Head to Toe)Select this option to scan both sides of the document (Head to Toe).

More...The [2 Sided Originals] screen is displayed. "[2 Sided Scanning] Screen" (P.150).

[2 Sided Scanning] Screen

1 Select whether the document is one-sided or two-sided. If [2 Sided] is selected, also select the orientation of the document.

1 SidedSelect this option to scan one side of the document.

2 SidedSelect this option to scan both sides of the document.

2 Sided (First Page 1 Sided)Select this option to scan the front side of the first page and both sides of the remaining pages. Use this item when the back side of the first page is blank.

2 Sided (Skip Blank Pages)Select this option to scan only the document pages that are not blank. You can send documents without concerning for which side is the front.Note • When [2 Sided - Skip Blank] is selected, the settings change as follows:

[Original Type] : [Text] [Lighten / Darken] : [Normal][Reduce/Enlarge] : [100%]

Fax/Internet Fax

151

Fax

4

• You can switch [Skip Blank Pages] by pressing the <Energy Saver> button while fax features are being set.

[2 Sided - Skip Blank] appears when [Skip Blank] is set to [Enabled]. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Skip Blank Pages" in the Administrator Guide.

OriginalsSelect [Head to Head] when both sides of the documents are in the same orientation.Select [Head to Toe] when the front and back sides of the documents are in opposite orientations.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)This feature allows you to select the type of the original document, such as text and photo documents.

1 Select the original type.

TextSelect this item when transmitting a document that contains only text.

Photo & TextSelect this item when transmitting a document that contains both text and photos. The machine automatically distinguishes the text and photo areas and sets the appropriate image quality for each area of the document.

PhotoSelect this item when transmitting documents that contain only photos.Note • If reduced in size, the scan documents may have stripes in their photo areas.

Resolution (Specifying the Scanning Resolution)You can set the resolution for the documents to be scanned.

Note • The machine scans a document at the specified resolution, but if the machine of the recipient does not support the resolution, the machine automatically changes the resolution to one supported by the recipient's machine and there is a corresponding loss in quality.

• The higher the resolution, the lower the transmission speed. Usually, we recommend using [Superfine (400dpi)] or lower.

• Only [Fine] is available for the Server Fax feature.The resolution can be set individually for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

4

4 Fax

152

1 Select the resolution.

Standard (200 x 100dpi)Select this item when transmitting standard documents.(Approx. 200 x 100 pels/25.4 mm)

Fine (200dpi)Select this item when transmitting documents with small text or detailed images.(Approx. 200 x 200 pels/25.4 mm)

Superfine (400dpi)Select this item when transmitting documents with fine images.(400 x 400 pels/25.4 mm)

Superfine (600dpi)Select this item when transmitting documents with extremely fine images.(600 x 600 pels/25.4 mm)

Layout Adjustment

153

Fax

4

Layout Adjustment

On the [Layout Adjustment] screen, you can configure features for scanning documents. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals) ................................................................. 153Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original) ....................................................... 153Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) ...................... 154Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets) .................................................. 155Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio) .............................................................................. 156



2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)This feature is the same as [2 Sided Scanning] on the [Fax/Internet Fax] tab. For information on [Fax/Internet Fax], refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Transmitting 2-sided Originals)" (P.150).

Original Size (Specifying the Scan Size for the Original)This feature allows you to set the scan size for fax transmission.The machine scans the document at the size you specify, regardless of the original size. You can add margins, or delete unwanted margins using this feature.The default values for buttons other than the [Auto Size Detect] button can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen.

2 Select the desired scan size.

Auto DetectDetects the document size automatically.

Document Feeder Document Glass

Auto-detectableDocument size

B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11"

B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11"

Fax

4

4 Fax

154

Note • When a document size cannot be detected automatically, a message appears prompting you to enter the document size.

Sizes that can be detected automatically vary depending on the settings made on "Paper Size Settings" in the System Administration mode. For information on the document sizes that can be automatically detected, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Standard SizeSelect the original size from preset sizes.You can change the default options. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Original Size Defaults" in the Administrator Guide.


When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously send different size documents with the sizes matching the respective sizes of the documents. You can also specify the size of the paper so that faxes are sent at the same paper size.Important • Always load the A5-size documents in portrait orientation.

• When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load B5 the documents in portrait orientation.

• Originals may not be scanned correctly if the top-left corners are not aligned properly.• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5

portrait and B4 landscape. If the combination of the document sizes is not our recommendation, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be scanned properly.


• Be sure to set [Original Size] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen to [Auto Size Detect], when using mixed sized documents.


2 Confirm that [Auto Detect] is selected and select [Save]. If [Auto Detect] is not set, select [Auto Detect], and then select [Save].


4 Select [On].


OnWhen scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Layout Adjustment

155

Fax

4

Book Faxing (Scanning Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets)You can scan the left and right pages of a bound document separately to fax them.This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans for facing pages of bound originals such as a booklet.Note • The document feeder does not support this feature.

• A non-standard sized document may not be properly divided into two separate pages.

1 Select [Book Faxing].

2 Select any item.

OffDoes not scan as a bound document.

Left Page then RightScans the left page and then the right page of facing pages.

Right Page then LeftScans the right page and then the left page of facing pages.

Top Page then BottomScans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages.

Both PagesScans in page order.

Left Page OnlyScans the left page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page OnlyScans the right page only. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page OnlyScans the top page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page OnlyScans the bottom page only. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] isselected.

Fax

4

4 Fax

156

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scan Ratio)This feature enlarges or reduces scanned images with a specified ratio.Important • Some destination machines may not be able to receive faxes at the specified ratio.

1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge].

2 Select a preset ratio, or specify a value.Note • If a magnification is specified in [Reduce/

Enlarge], automatic rotation transmission does not work.

Copy ratio entry boxTouch the box displaying a value, and thenuse the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ]buttons to specify a ratio within the range of50 - 400% in 1% increments.

100%Scans at the same size as the original.

Auto %If the scan width of the document is greater than the maximum image size, the scanned image is rotated or reduced to fit the maximum size. When speed dialing is used, the maximum image size will be the size registered in Address Number. When speed dialing is not used, the maximum size will be A3. You can specify whether to rotate documents in the System Settings. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Rotate 90 degrees" in the Administrator Guide.

Copy ratioSelect from preset copy ratios.You can change the default values of reduce/enlarge scan ratios other than "100%" and "Auto %". For information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax/Internet Fax Options

157

Fax

4


You can specify fax transmission conditions in the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results) .............................................. 157Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode) .................................................................. 159Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time).......................................... 160Transmission Header Text (Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes)................... 161Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page) .................................................... 162Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject) ..................................................... 164Internet Fax Message (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents) .............................................. 164Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine) ............................... 165Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet) ...................................................... 166Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox).............................................................................. 166F Code (Using F Code Transmission)...................................................................................... 168Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles)............................................................ 170Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME) ..................................................... 171Digital Signature (Sending iFax with a Digital Signature by S/MIME) .................................. 172


2 Select the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] tab, and then select a feature on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.Note • Only [Delay Start] is available for the

Server Fax feature.

Acknowledgement Report (Confirming Transmission Results)You can check fax and Internet Fax transmission results.To receive fax transmission results, set [Confirmation Options] to [Print Report] under [Acknowledgement Report]. By enabling this feature, the machine automatically prints a transmission report when fax transmission completes successfully, and prints a transmission report (undelivered) when fax transmission ends unsuccessfully.To receive Internet Fax transmission results, select [Read Receipts]. There are two types of [Read Receipts]: [Read Receipts] and [Delivery Receipts]. Each has different items that you can confirm.When selecting [Read Receipts], you can check whether or not the Internet Fax you sent was delivered to the recipient’s mailbox successfully. When selecting [Delivery Receipts], you can check whether or not the Internet Fax you sent was correctly delivered and the attached files were correctly processed.Note • The optional package is necessary to use the Read Receipts feature. For information,

contact our Customer Support Center.• The Read Receipts feature can be used when the recipient’s machine supports MDN. The

Delivery Receipts feature can be used when the recipient’s machine supports DSN.• You can select either [Read Receipts] or [Delivery Receipts] in the System Settings. Refer to

"5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

4

4 Fax

158

• You can only use the Delivery Receipts (DSN) feature to check the delivery of e-mail to servers that support this feature. Furthermore, if any of the e-mail servers on the transmission route do not support DSN, you cannot confirm the delivery of the e-mail, even if the e-mail has been delivered successfully. For this reason, the result of the Delivery Receipts may differ from the actual delivery status.

• If [Confirmation Options] is set to [Print Report] and the transmission completes unsuccessfully, [Transmission Report - Job Undelivered] will be printed.

This section describes how to use the MDN feature. The procedure is the same for theDSN feature.

1 Select [Acknowledgement Report].

2 Select any item.

Confirmation Options

No reportNo Transmission Report is printed.

Print ReportA Transmission Report is automatically printed when the transmission completes successfully. If the transmission does not end successfully, a "Transmission Report - Job Undelivered" is printed.

Read Receipts

OffThe Read Receipts feature is not activated.

OnThe Read Receipts feature is activated. You can check whether the Internet Fax you sent was delivered to the recipient's mailbox successfully.


159

Fax

4

Starting Rate (Selecting a Communication Mode)You can select a communication mode based on the features of the remote machine.G3 is the international standard for facsimile transmissions established by the ITU-T.

Important • When the speed dialing, one touch buttons, group dial numbers, or address book is used to specify a recipient registered in an address number, the communications mode currently set to the address number is set and cannot be changed. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • The default communication mode can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default mode, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Starting Rate" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Starting Rate] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

2 Set the communication mode.

G3 AutoSelect this mode if the remote machine is G3 compatible. This mode is the one normally selected.In accordance with the reception capabilities of the remote machine, the machine automatically switches modes in the following order: G3 Unique ECM G3 Unique ITU-T G3 ECM ITU-T G3.

Forced 4800 bpsSelect this mode when transmitting over noisy or poor telephone lines, as can be the case with overseas calls.Also select this mode when transmitting over noisy or poor telephone lines domestically.

G4 AutoDo not use this mode.Note • [G4 Auto] is displayed on when Internet Fax Kit is installed. This setting applies the

transmission speed between the fax gateway and destination fax for the Internet Fax.

About Forced 4800 bpsYou can communicate with faxes overseas via telephone company exchanges, etc.Note • The international telephone networks are originally designed for voice communications.

Noise that does not really affect voice communications causes a problem with fax communications. It may result in the deterioration of images quality, the inability to transmit a fax, or even terminate the transmission. Regardless of whether transmission is successful, you are charged for the call once the line is connected. For information on line trouble and call charges, contact your telephone company.

• If you select [F4800], the transmission time may be longer because transmission is performed at 4800 bps or less to ensure transmission is successful.

Fax

4

4 Fax

160

1 Select [Communication Mode] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

2 Select [F4800], then [Save].

3 Enter the telephone company ID number, "0011", country code, area code, and recipient fax number as shown below.

Important • In some areas, you may need to enter a pause after the telephone company ID number.

Priority Send / Delay Start (Specifying Send Priority/Send Time)Priority Send allows you to give priority to a fax or polling job over other jobs.Delay Start allows you to specify when to send your fax. This feature is useful for sending fax when communication charges are low, such as during night time.

Note • This feature is unavailable for Internet Fax and Server Fax.• [Priority Send] can be set in combination with [Delay Start]. If both features are set, Priority

Send is performed at the set time.

1 Select [Priority Send / Delay Start].

2 Select any item.

Priority Send

OffPriority Send is not applied.

OnPriority Send is applied.

Note • If the Priority Send feature is selected during transmission, the fax will be sent after the current transmission ends.

• In redial mode, the fax will be resent preferentially after the set redial interval.• The Priority Send feature cannot be set separately for each recipient of Broadcast and multi-

polling jobs.You can give priority to a pending job. For more information, refer to "Job Status" (P.287).

Delay Start

OffDelay Start is not applied.

Specific TimeDelay Start is applied.


161

Fax

4

Important • If a power failure occurs or if the power is turned off after the Delay Start feature is set, the setting is cleared and transmission begins as soon as the power is turned on.

Note • You can specify a time within 24 hours in 1 minute increments. You cannot specify a date.• You can set [Delay Start] separately for each address number. For information on how to

register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

• If address numbers or group dial numbers are used for the Broadcast Send feature, the Delay Start setting specified for each address number is invalid.

• If the fax cannot be sent at the specified time because, for example, the telephone line is busy, it will be sent as soon as the line becomes available.

Specific TimeDisplays the [Delay Start - Specific Time] screen. Refer to "[Delay Start - Specific Time] Screen" (P.161).

[Delay Start - Specific Time] ScreenAllows you to specify the start time.Note • The default value of [Start Time] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For

more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Delay Start - Specific Time" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [AM] or [PM].

2 Enter [Hours] and [Minutes].Important • If you press the <Start> button after the

specified time, the stored document will be sent at the specified time on the following day.

Transmission Header Text (Adding Sender Name and Phone Number to Faxes)

The Transmission Header Text feature adds the start time, sender name, recipient name, G3 ID, and number of pages onto the transmitted document.This feature enables the recipient to confirm when and from whom the fax was sent.Important • The Transmission Header Text is printed at the top of the document, so an area of about 3 to

5 mm may not be printed at the top of each page at the remote machine.

Note • If the document is resent, "Resend" is printed at the left of the date and time indication.• If this feature is enabled for Broadcast transmission, header information is attached to faxes

for all the recipients.• The start time is printed in the format set on the machine (12 or 24 hour clock). For

information on setting the time, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" in the Administrator Guide.

• The recipient name is only added if it has been registered in the address number.For information on the sender name and G3 ID, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Local Terminal Information" in the Administrator Guide.The default value of [Transmission Header Text] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Transmission Header Text" in the Administrator Guide.

Fax

4

4 Fax

162

1 Select [Transmission Header Text].

2 Select [On].

OffNo sender information is added.

Display HeaderSender information is added.

Cover Page (Transmitting Documents With a Cover Page)Cover Note is a feature for attaching a cover page to the document.It includes the recipient name, comment, sender name, machine fax number, number of pages, and send date and time.[Cover Note] can be individually set for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.Note • This feature is not available for the Server Fax feature.

• When [Transmission Header Text] is set, the sender information is not printed on the cover note.

• You cannot use the Cover Note feature for Broadcast transmission using the numeric keypad. To use this Cover Note feature for Broadcast transmission, register recipients to address numbers.

• The size and resolution of the cover note is based on the first page of the document.

1 Select [Cover Page] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

2 Select [On].

OffNo cover note is added.

Print Cover PageA cover note is added.

Recipient's CommentThe [Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] screen is displayed. Refer to "[Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] Screen" (P.163).

Sender's CommentThe [Cover Page - Sender's Comment] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Cover Page - Sender's Comment] Screen" (P.163).


163

Fax

4

[Cover Page - Recipient's Comment] ScreenSelect a comment to be added to the recipient field.

1 Select any item.

NoneNo comment is added to the recipient field.

CommentA comment is added to the recipient field.Select a comment from [Select Comment].

Select CommentThe registered comments are displayed.For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Fax Comment" in the Administrator Guide.

[Cover Page - Sender's Comment] ScreenSelect a comment to be added to the sender field.

1 Select any item.

NoneNo comment is added to the sender field.

CommentA comment is added to the sender field.Select a comment from the registered comments.


About the Cover Page

ToWhen an address number is used, the recipient name registered for the address number is printed. This field is blank if no recipient name is registered for the address number.

Recipient's CommentPrints the comment selected on the [Cover Page - Recipient’s Comment] screen.

Fax

4

4 Fax

164

FromPrints the registered sender name.

Sender's CommentPrints the comment selected on the [Cover Page - Sender’s Comment] screen.

Fax NumberPrints the fax number of the machine. For G3 communications, "G3 ID" is printed.

Number of PagesPrints the number of pages.

Send Date and TimePrints the transmission date and time.

RemarksPrints remarks when the document is sent using Broadcast, Mailbox, Relay Broadcast, or Redial Mode.

Internet Fax Subject (Specifying the Internet Fax Subject) You can specify an Internet Fax subject. If no subject is specified, the preset subject will be automatically entered.Note • This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


1 Select [Internet Fax Subject].

2 Select [Keyboard].

3 Enter a subject using the keyboard displayed. Up to 128 characters can be entered. For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).Note • If no subject is entered, the following will

be automatically entered as a subject: [InternetFAX:<From> : <Send Date and Time>].

Internet Fax Message (Editing the Internet Fax Mail Contents)You can edit Internet Fax comments. Enter text using the keyboard or use a pre-registered comment.Note • This feature may not be available for some models. The optional package is necessary. For

more information, contact our Customer Support Center.For information on how to register comments, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Fax Comment" in the Administrator Guide.


165

Fax

4

1 Select [Internet Fax Message].

2 Select any item.

Delete TextDeletes the comment displayed on the screen.

KeyboardAllows you to enter body text using the keyboard. Up to 256 characters can be entered. You can also click [Add Comment] to select a registered comment and edit it.For information on how to enter the characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).

Add CommentAllows you to insert a registered comment. Click this button to display the [Internet Fax Comment (Mail Contents) - Add Comment] screen. For information, refer to "[Add Comment] Screen" (P.165)

[Add Comment] ScreenSelect a comment to be added.

1 Select any item.


Recipient Print Sets (Printing Multiple Sets at the Destination Machine)This feature allows you to print multiple sets of a fax document at the destination machine.Note • This feature is not available for Server Fax.

1 Select [Recipient Print Sets] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

2 Select any item.

1 SetThe destination machine will output one set of the fax document.

Multiple SetsAllows you to specify the number of print sets within the range from 2 to 99 in increments of 1. Use [ ] and [ ] or the numeric keypad on the screen to specify the number of print sets.

Fax

4

4 Fax

166

Multiple-Up (Combining Multiple Pages into One Sheet)This feature allows you to print multiple pages of a document onto one side of a single sheet of paper. For example, if you have a document of 12 pages, and you select [3 Pages Up], the machine combines the scan data into 4 pages. You can specify a multiple-up value in the range of 2 to 9.Important • If the length of each resultant page is too long, the output data may be split on the recipient

machine. • If number of pages of documents is smaller than the specified pages, scanned number of

pages will be only combined and transmitted.

Note • This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Select [Multiple-Up].

2 Select [On].

OffMultiple-Up is not applied.

OnMultiple-Up is applied. Specify the number of pages in [Originals]. Use [ ] and [ ] to enter the number of pages.

Remote Mailbox (Using Remote Mailbox)Remote Mailbox is a feature for sending or receiving confidential documents that you do not want others to see.Note • This feature is not available for Server Fax.

Sending to Mailbox (Fax Signal Method)This feature allows you to send a document directly to a mailbox on the destination machine. The document can be printed on the destination machine. To use this feature, you need the mailbox number and passcode of the destination mailbox.

Private Polling (Fax Signal Method)This feature allows you to retrieve a document from a mailbox on a remote machine by sending a polling request from your machine. To use this feature, you need the mailbox number and passcode of the remote mailbox.The retrieved document is stored in a mailbox on the machine. When a document is received in a mailbox, the <Job in Memory> indicator lights and a [Mailbox Report] is printed. The [Mailbox Report] includes the mailbox number and name.Important • You cannot use polling to retrieve documents from multiple remote mailboxes

simultaneously.

Note • The DTMF method is available for this feature. The supported signals are numerals, *, and #.

For information on printing received documents, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.245)".Documents received in mailboxes can be automatically printed. For information on the mailbox settings, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.249).Depending on the report print settings, a Mailbox Report may not be printed after a document is received in a mailbox. For information on the report print settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide.


167

Fax

4

Sending to Mailbox (DTMF Method)To send a fax to a mailbox using the DTMF method, you need the mailbox number of the destination mailbox. Two DTMF methods are available: Auto and Manual.

Sending to Mailbox (Fax Signal Method)

1 Select [Remote Mailbox] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

2 Select [On].

OffDisables the Remote Mailbox feature.

OnEnables the Remote Mailbox feature. Enter a mailbox number into [Remote Mailbox Number].

Remote Mailbox NumberEnter a 3-digit mailbox number using the numeric keypad.

Mailbox PasscodeEnter the 4-digit passcode of the remote mailbox using the numeric keypad. If a passcode has not been set, leave this box blank.

Private Polling (Fax Signal Method)

1 Select [More Options] tab to display the [More Options] screen.

2 Select [Remote Polling].

3 Select [Poll a Remote Device].

4 Select [Save].

5 Select the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] tab to display the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

6 Select [Remote Mailbox].

7 Select [On].

OffDisables the Private Polling feature.

OnEnables the Private Polling feature. Enter a mailbox number into [Remote Mailbox Number].

Remote Mailbox NumberEnter a 3-digit mailbox number using the numeric keypad.

Fax

4

4 Fax

168

Mailbox PasscodeEnter the 4-digit passcode of the remote mailbox using the numeric keypad. If a passcode has not been set, leave this box blank.

Format for Auto Send (DTMF Method)

1 Select [Keyboard] to display a keyboard on the touch screen, and enter the destination and passcode in the following format.

Format for Manual Send (DTMF Method)

1 Select the [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)] button on the [More Options] screen to display a keyboard on the touch screen, and enter the destination and passcode in the following format.

Note • Use the keyboard on the touch screen to enter symbols such as "!" and "∗". For information on how to enter characters, "Entering Text" (P.51).

• Enter a passcode only if necessary.• You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.

By registering destinations into address numbers using the above dialing formats, you can use the address numbers for the Private Polling feature. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

F Code (Using F Code Transmission)F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information Network Association of Japan and is the T.30 (communication protocol) method for using sub-addresses that was standardized by the ITU-T. The F Code feature enables various features to be used with transmission among F Code-compatible machines manufactured by different companies.When using F Code transmission, use an F Code and password. The F Code, which is also called a sub-address by other companies, must be registered (entered). Set the password if necessary.Note • This feature is not available for Server Fax except when an F code is included in a dialing

number.• To use the F Code feature, you need to confirm the F Code of the recipients machine in

advance.You can set the F Code and password for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.249).You can use Relay Broadcast/Remote Relay Broadcast with F Code transmission. For information on Relay Broadcast, refer to "Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station)" (P.178).

You can use the following features with F Code transmission.

Passcode ofmailbox on remote machine

Mailbox number on remote machine




169

Fax

4

Sending to Mailbox (F Code Method)When a mailbox is set on a remote machine, you can send a document directly to the mailbox by specifying the F code (sub-address) and password (if set up) of the mailbox.Obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the destination mailbox in advance.Example of specifying a destination:F Code (sub-address) : 0 (to designate an F Code transmission) and the

mailbox number of a mailbox on the remote machinePassword (if necessary) : The password of the mailbox

Private Polling (F Code Method)When a mailbox is set on a remote machine, you can perform private polling for the mailbox by specifying its F code (sub-address) and password (if set up).If you use your machine to perform private polling for a mailbox on a remote machine, obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the target mailbox. If you use a remote machine to perform private polling for a mailbox on your machine, give the following information. F Code (sub-address) : 0 (to designate an F Code transmission) and the

mailbox number of the target mailboxPassword (if necessary) : The password of the target mailboxNote • Mailbox reception using the DTMF method is possible, but the only signals that can be

received are numerals, ∗, and #.It may be possible to automatically print a document received in the mailbox depending on the mailbox settings. For information about setting the mailbox, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.249).Depending on the report print settings, the [Mailbox Report] may not be printed even if e-mail is received in the mailbox. For information on setting the report print settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide.For information on printing received documents, refer to "Printing Documents in a Mailbox" (P.246).

Sending to Mailbox (F Code Method)

1 Select [F Code] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options] screen.

2 Select [On].

3 Select [F Code], and then enter an F code using numeric keys.Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the F

code.

4 If required, select [Password], and then enter a password using numeric keys.Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.

OffThe F code transmission is not used.

OnThe F code transmission is used. Enter the F Code.

F CodeEnter the F code using the numeric keypad.Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the F Code.

Fax

4

4 Fax

170

PasswordEnter the password using the numeric keypad. If a password has not been set, leave this box blank.Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.

Private Polling (F Code Method)

1 Select the [More Options] tab to display the [More Options] screen.



4 Select [Save].


6 Select [F Code].

7 Select [On].

8 Select [F Code], and then enter the F Code using the numeric keypad.Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the F

Code.

9 If necessary, select [Password], and then enter a password using the numeric keypad.Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the

password.

OffPrivate Polling is not used.

Poll a Remote DevicePrivate Polling is used.

Internet Fax Profile (Specifying Internet Fax Profiles)A profile is specified to restrict attribute information such as image resolution and paper size for transmissions between Internet Fax-compatible machines.Note • This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.• The profiles that can be processed differ depending on the Internet Fax-compatible machine

of the recipient. Before specifying a profile, confirm the profiles the Internet Fax-compatible machine of the recipient can process.

• If inconsistency occurs between a profile, and stored document size and resolution, priority is given to the settings specified in the profile.

• If the profile differs for each recipient when using Broadcast Send, the smallest size becomes the maximum image size.

You can set an Internet Fax profile for each address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.


171

Fax

4

The default values of [Internet Fax Profile] can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Defaults" > "Internet Fax Profile" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Internet Fax Profile].

2 Select the profile.

TIFF-SThis profile is the Internet Fax standard. For documents that are larger than A4, the size is reduced automatically to A4 for transmission.

Encoding method : MH

Stored Document Size : A4

Resolution : Standard, Fine

TIFF-FSelect this profile when you specify super-fine for the resolution or when you send A3 or B4 documents.

Encoding method : MMR

Stored Document Size : A4, B4, A3

Resolution : Standard, Fine, Superfine (400 dpi), Superfine (600 dpi)Note • When a fax is sent to a machine that does not support TIFF-F, the recipient machine will not

be able to display or print the images.

TIFF-JSelect this profile for sending documents in JBIG.

Encoding method : JBIG

Stored Document Size : A4, B4, A3

Resolution : Standard, Fine, Superfine (400 dpi), Superfine (600 dpi)Note • When a fax is sent to a machine that does not support TIFF-J, the recipient machine will not

be able to display or print the images.

Encryption (Sending Internet Fax Encrypted by S/MIME)You can send Internet Fax encrypted by S/MIME.When sending encrypted Internet Fax, select a recipient with a certificate that can be encrypted from Address Book.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

OffSends Internet Fax without encryption.

OnSends encrypted Internet Fax.

Fax

4

4 Fax

172

Digital Signature (Sending iFax with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)You can send Internet Fax with a digital signature by S/MIME.Digital Signature allows a recipient to confirm whether the contents of the Internet Fax are changed, or whether the Internet Fax is sent from the proper sender.To use this feature, the machine's mail address must be linked to a certificate.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.For information on how to link a certificate to the machine’s e-mail address, refer to "12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" > "Step 1 Configuration on the Machine" in the Administrator Guide.

OffSends iFax without a digital signature.

OnSends iFax with a digital signature.

More Options

173

Fax

4

More Options

You can set the polling and on-hook features in the [More Options] screen. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Remote Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines) .......................................... 173Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine) 175On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission) ............................. 176


2 Select the [More Options] tab, and then select a feature on the [More Options] screen.

Remote Polling (Retrieving Documents from Remote Machines)Remote Polling is a feature that allows your machine to retrieve a document stored in a remote machine. You are charged for the transmission fee.This feature is used for Facsimile Information Services.For information on Facsimile Information Services, refer to "Receiving Faxes" (P.187).Note • Depending on the remote machine, the Polling feature may be unavailable.

• This feature is not available for Server Fax.• When you specify polling in combination with [Delay Start] on the [Fax/Internet Fax Options]

screen, you can retrieve a document at a specified time.

Remote PollingYou can retrieve a document stored on a remote machine by sending a poling request from your machine. You can also retrieve documents from multiple machines. This is known as Multi-Polling.

Private Polling (DTMF Method)You can retrieve a document from a mailbox on a remote machine by sending a request from your machine. A mailbox must be created on the remote machine. If the mailbox is passcode-protected, you can retrieve a document confidentially.Important • You cannot use polling to retrieve documents from multiple remote mailboxes

simultaneously.

Fax

4

4 Fax

174

Remote Polling

1 Select [Remote Polling] on the [More Options] screen.

2 Select [Poll a Remote Device].Note • To use Multi-Polling, specify multiple

recipients.

OffDisables the Polling feature.

Poll a Remote DeviceEnables the Polling feature.

Private Polling (DTMF Method)

1 Select [New Recipients] on the [Fax/Internet Fax] screen to display the keyboard on the touch screen.

2 Enter a format corresponding to Auto Send or Manual Send, and then select [Save].

3 Select the [More Options] screen to display the [More Options] screen.



6 Select [Save].

OffDisables the Private Polling feature.

Poll a Remote DeviceEnables the Private Poling feature.

Format for Auto Send

Format for Manual Send

Note • Use the keyboard on the touch screen to enter symbols such as "!" and "∗". For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).





More Options

175

Fax

4

• Enter a passcode only if necessary.• You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.

By registering destinations into address numbers using the above dialing formats, you can use the address numbers for the Private Polling feature. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine)

Store for Polling is to store a document on your machine so as a remote machine can retrieve it from your machine. There are two methods of Store for Polling: Store for Free Polling and Store for Secure Polling.The machine can be set to automatically delete documents after they are retrieved with polling. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Polled Documents - Auto Delete" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • This feature is not available for Server Fax.

1 Select [Store for Polling] on the [More Options] screen.

2 Select any item.


Store for Free PollingStores the document into the public mailbox on the machine. The document in the public mailbox can be retrieved by a remote machine.

Store for Secure PollingStores the document into a private mailbox on the machine. If the mailbox is passcode-protected, the document can be retrieved by a remote machine confidentially.A private mailbox must be created on the machine. For more information on registering a mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

Save in:

When selecting [Store for Free Polling]The [Public Mailbox] button is displayed. When the button is selected, the [Public Mailbox] screen appears.

For more information, refer to "[Public Mailbox] Screen" (P.176).

When selecting [Store for Secure Polling]The [Private Mailbox] button is displayed. When the button is selected, the [Mailbox] screen appears. Select a mailbox to store documents.For information on how to select a mailbox, refer to "Selecting a Mailbox" (P.242). For information on how to check and print/delete documents for Private Polling, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.243).

Fax

4

4 Fax

176

[Public Mailbox] ScreenYou can print and delete documents stored for polling.

1 Select the document to print or delete. You can select either one document or all documents.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous


RefreshRefreshes the information about documents stored in the public mailbox.

Select AllSelects all documents stored in the public mailbox.

DeleteDeletes the selected document. Selecting this button displays a confirmation screen. Select [Yes] on the screen to delete the document.

PrintPrints the selected document.

On-hook (Confirming Remote Machine Response Prior to Transmission)Use this feature when using Manual Send.Manual Send is the transmission method that allows you to send a fax after you make a phone call to a destination machine and then check that the connection is established. This feature can be used with the receiver (optional) either off-hook or on-hook.It is recommended that you set the line monitor volume to "Loud".Note • If an error occurs during transmission of, for example, the second page, the transmission of

the first page may also end abnormally.The volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the volume, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Lift the receiver, or select [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)] on the [More Options] screen.

More Options

177

Fax

4

2 Select any item.

Manual Receive/Manual SendUse the drop-down menu to switch between [Manual Receive] and [Manual Send].

Manual Send: Allows you to check if connection is established before sending a fax.

Manual Receive: Allows you to receive a fax manually, such as Facsimile Information Services.

Alphanumeric character buttonsDisplays alphanumeric characters. Use alphanumeric characters to specify a destination.Note • Touch-tone dialing may not be available depending on the services provided.

• When the dial type is Tone, the [Tone (:)] button is not displayed on the screen. When the dial type is Pulse, select [Tone (:)] if you want to use touch-tone dialing.

More CharactersSelecting this button displays a symbol screen, allowing you to use symbols to specify a destination.

Exit (Line Cut)Cuts the line connected.

Fax

4

4 Fax

178

Broadcast

This section describes setting Broadcast Send and Relay Broadcast.Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients).............................................................178Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station).....................................178Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations) .......................182

Broadcast Send (Transmitting to Multiple Recipients)The Broadcast Send feature allows you to transmit the same document to multiple recipients with a single operation. There is no need to repeat the same operation for each recipient.When an Additional G3 Port Kit (optional) is installed, you can use the extra lines to make multiple transmissions simultaneously with Broadcast Send.If you specify Broadcast Send, the machine prints a relay broadcast report/multi-poll report after the Broadcast Send operation finishes.Note • The maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using the

numeric keypad: 200 locations; using address numbers: 500 locations; and using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 699 locations.

• When an Address Book Extension Kit (optional) is installed, the maximum number of recipients that you can specify at one time is as follows: Using address numbers: 999 locations; and using the numeric keypad in combination with address numbers: 1198 locations.

• One touch buttons are associated with address numbers 001 to 070.• When using Broadcast Send, the Cover Page and Remote Mailbox features are not

available even if they are enabled on the control panel. If you want to use [Cover Page] and [Remote Mailbox], set them when registering each recipient in an address number.

• The transmission report feature is not available. Check Broadcast/Multi-poll reports to see transmission results.

1 Select the first recipient.

2 Select [+ Add].

3 Select the next recipient.

4 Repeat Step 3 and Step 4.


6 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen to start transmission.

Relay Broadcast (Transmitting Documents Through a Relay Station)The Relay Broadcast feature transmits documents to multiple recipients via other fax machines (relay stations). When a document is to be transmitted over a long distance to multiple recipients, it is first transmitted to one relay station and from there to multiple recipients. When you transmit documents over a long distance to many recipients, using Relay Broadcast can save on call charges.Furthermore, multiple Relay Broadcast operations can be performed simultaneously. This is referred to as Multiple Relay Broadcast.There are three Relay Broadcast methods.

Broadcast

179

Fax

4

Fax Signal MethodThis method employs a Fuji Xerox proprietary communication procedure that is only for use with specific machines that have the Relay Broadcast feature. The G3 mode is available.

DTMF MethodG3 fax machines that support Manual Send can make Relay Broadcast for the machine.

F Code MethodThis method can be used among machines that have the F Code and the Relay Broadcast features. The G3 is available.

Before using the Relay Broadcast FeatureBefore using the Relay Broadcast feature, register the following information in the address numbers of initiating stations and relay stations.For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.

Note • The above describes using Relay Broadcast with the machine. When using a machine of a different model as a relay station, obtain the F Code (sub-address) and password of the target recipient machine.

Where Contents

Initiating Station

Fax Signal MethodAssign the relay station to an address number (001 to 500*) to set up the Relay Broadcast feature.

Register the last two digits of the address number of the initiating station (which is already registered at a relay station) as a relay station ID for the Relay Broadcast operation.Register the address numbers or group dial number of the relay recipients (which are registered at a relay station) as broadcast recipients. The wildcard "∗" can be used.

DTMF Method (G3)/F Code MethodNo registration is required. The dialing format can be registered to an address number.

Relay Station

Fax Signal MethodAssign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 099 and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 099. The relay recipients can also be assigned group dial numbers from the initiating station.

DTMF Method (G3)/F Code MethodAssign the initiating station either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code). Then, set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].Assign the relay recipients to an address number.Assign the relay recipient either to a relay station address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code).

Fax

4

4 Fax

180

Fax Signal Method

1 Select an address number or group dial number to which a relay broadcast is registered and press the <Start> button.To perform Multiple Relay Broadcast, repeat this step.

DTMF MethodThere are two methods in the DTMF method: Auto Send and Manual Send.

Auto Send (transmitting without picking up the receiver)

1 Select [Keyboard] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter in the following format.

2 Select [+ Add] to perform Multiple Relay Broadcast.Note • You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.

PasswordA pre-registered two-digit number

Note • By default, no password is set. For setting a password, contact our Customer Support Center. If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one.

Relay station IDThe last two digits of the initiating station address number registered at the relay station

Address numberAn address number for the relay recipients registered at the relay stationThe wildcard "∗" can also be used.

The above dialing format can be registered in an address number to send using the address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.


Manual Send (transmitting with picking up the receiver or on-hook)


2 Select [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)].

Broadcast

181

Fax

4

3 Select [Manual Send] from the drop-down menu.

4 Use the keyboard shown in the touch screen to enter numbers in the following format.

Note • You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.

F Code MethodWhen the machine is an initiating station, you can perform Relay Broadcast by registering the relay station’s F code and password (if necessary) to the machine.When the machine is a relay station, you can perform Relay Broadcast by registering the machine’s F code and password (if necessary) to an initiating station.Important • When performing Relay Broadcast with the F Code method, you can use a password if you

set a receive password for the relay station.

Note • When performing Relay Broadcast with machines of this model, we recommend using the fax signal method.

• When using a machine of a different model as a relay station, confirm the F Code (sub-address) and password of the target recipient machine.

When using the machine as a relay station, the F Code that is transmitted to the initiating station is as follows.

Relay BroadcastThe number of digits of the relay station ID:1: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are two digits2: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are three digits

Print DirectivePrinting/not printing at the relay station1: Printing at the relay station0: Not printing at the relay station

Relay Station IDAn address number for an initiating station registered at the relay stationWhen the relay station ID is set, the initiating station is notified of the results of a Relay Broadcast.When the relay station ID is "00" or "000", the initiating station is not notified of the results of a Relay Broadcast.

Relay Broadcast Print Directive

Relay Station ID

Address Number

Address Number

Address Number ....

Up to 20 digits

Fax

4

4 Fax

182

Address NumberThe address number assigned to the relay recipient

The following shows an example of F Code that indicates printing at the relay station, notifying the initiating station (100) of the results, and performing Relay Broadcast to relay recipients (200, 201, 202 and 203).F Code Example: 21100200201202203


2 Select [F Code].

3 Select [On].

4 Enter the F Code with the numeric keypad.Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the F

Code.

5 If necessary, enter the password using the numeric keypad and select [Next].Important • You can enter up to 20 digits for the password.

Remote Relay Broadcast (Performing Relay Broadcast to Remote Locations)

The Remote Relay Broadcast feature combines two or more Relay Broadcast operations and use Broadcast Send.This feature is more economical than Relay Broadcast in transmitting documents to multiple remote machines.Note • Multiple Relay Broadcast can be performed from a secondary relay station.

There are three Relay Broadcast methods.

Fax Signal MethodThis method employs a Fuji Xerox proprietary communication procedure that is only for use with specific machines that have the Relay Broadcast feature. The G3 is available.

DTMF MethodG3 fax machines that support Manual Send can make Remote Relay Broadcast for the machine.

F Code MethodThis method can be used among machines that have the F Code and the Relay Broadcast features. The G3 is available.

Fax Signal MethodRegister the following information in the address numbers of initiating stations and relay stations in advance.For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Broadcast

183

Fax

4* When the Speed Dial Extension Kit is installed, it will be 001 to 999.

1 Select an address number or group dial number to which a remote relay broadcast is registered and press the <Start> button.

DTMF MethodRegister the following information in the address numbers of the primary relay station and the secondary relay station in advance.For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.


Important • You can specify any machine that supports our DTMF method feature.

Where Contents

Initiating Station

Assign the relay station to an address number (001 to 500*) to set up the Relay Broadcast feature.

Register the last two digits of the address number of the initiating station (which is already registered at a primary relay station) as a relay station ID.Register the address numbers or group dial number of the secondary relay stations (which are registered at a primary relay station) as broadcast recipients.

PrimaryRelay Station

Assign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 099 and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].Assign the secondary relay station to an address number from 001 to 099.

As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the address number for the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.As the broadcast recipients, assign the address number for the relay recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.

SecondaryRelay Station

Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 500*.Relay recipients of address number 100 or above can be registered to a group and specified by address number.

Where Contents


Assign the initiating station to an address number from 001 to 500* and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].Assign the secondary relay station to an address number from 001 to 500*.

As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.


Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].Assign the relay recipient to an address number from 001 to 500*.

Fax

4

4 Fax

184

Auto Send (transmitting without picking up the receiver)

1 Select [Keyboard] to display the keyboard on the touch screen and enter in the following format.

2 Select [+ Add] to perform Multiple Relay Broadcast.

PasswordA pre-registered two-digit number

Note • By default, no password is set. For setting a password, contact our Customer Support Center. If a password has not been set, you do not need to enter one.

Relay Station IDThe last two digits of the initiating station address number registered at the primary relay station

Address NumberThe address number for the secondary relay station registered at the primary relay station

The above dialing format can be registered in an address number to send using the address number. For information on how to register address numbers, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.

Manual Send (transmitting with picking up the receiver or on-hook)


2 Pick up the telephone receiver, or select [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)].

3 Select [Manual Send] from the drop-down menu.

4 Use the keyboard shown in the touch screen to enter numbers in the following format.

Note • You can specify up to 20 locations for relay recipients.

Broadcast

185

Fax

4

F Code MethodWhen using the machine as the initiating station for performing Remote Relay Broadcast, confirm the F Code and the password (if necessary) for the primary relay station.When using the machine as the primary relay station for performing Remote Relay Broadcast, inform the initiating station of the F Code (sub-address) and the password (if necessary) and confirm the F Code for the secondary relay station.When using the machine as the secondary relay station for performing Remote Relay Broadcast, inform the primary relay station of the F Code and the password (if necessary).Register the following information in the address numbers of the primary relay station and the secondary relay station in advance.


Important • When using the F Code method for Remote Relay Broadcast, the primary relay stations and secondary relay stations must support our F Code method and be equipped with the Relay Broadcast feature.

Note • When performing Relay Broadcast with machines of this model, we recommend using the fax signal method.

When using the machine as a relay station, the F Code that is transmitted to the initiating station is as follows.

Relay BroadcastThe number of digits of the relay station ID:1: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are two digits2: When the relay station IDs and address numbers are three digits

Where Contents


Assign the initiating station either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code). Then, set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].Assign the secondary relay station either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code).

As the relay station ID, assign the last two digits of the Address Number for the primary relay station that is registered to the secondary relay station.As the broadcast recipients, assign the Address Number for the relay recipients that have been registered to the secondary relay station.


Assign the primary relay station to the same address number as that of the initiating station registered at the primary relay station, and set Relay Station Setup of the address number to [On].Assign the relay recipients either to an address number from 001 to 500* (when the specification method for the initiating station is 3 digits in F Code) or to 001 to 099 (when the specification method for the initiating station is 2 digits in F Code).

Relay Broadcast Print Directive

Primary Relay Station ID

Address Number

Address Number

Address Number

....

Up to 20 digits

Fax

4

4 Fax

186

Print DirectivePrinting/not printing at the relay station1: Printing at the primary relay station 0: No printing at the primary relay station

Primary Relay Station IDThe address number for the initiating station registered at the primary relay stationWhen the primary relay station ID is set, the initiating station is notified of the results of the Remote Relay Broadcast.When the relay station ID is "00" or "000", the initiating station is not notified of the results of a Remote Relay Broadcast.

Address NumberThe address number assigned to the secondary relay stationThe operating procedure is the same as for Relay Broadcast.

Receiving Faxes

187

Fax

4

Receiving Faxes

There are two reception modes: Auto Receive and Manual Receive.In the Auto Receive mode, reception of a fax from a remote machine begins automatically.In the Manual Receive mode, reception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This mode is convenient for confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm whether it is a fax before beginning reception.The Fax Receiving Mode default value can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Fax Service Settings" > "Fax Control" > "Fax Receiving Mode" in the Administrator Guide.

Switching between Auto Receive and Manual Receive

1 Press the <Machine Status> button.

2 Select [Fax Receiving Mode] on the [Machine Information] screen.

3 Select [Manual Receive] or [Auto Receive].

Manual ReceiveReception of a fax from a remote machine is manual. This mode is convenient for confirming the sender or using an external telephone to confirm whether it is a fax before beginning reception.

Auto ReceiveReception of a fax from a remote machine begins automatically.

Using Auto ReceiveWhen the machine is in the Auto Receive mode, it automatically answers incoming calls and receives documents.Note • You can set the length of time that the machine rings when there is an incoming call. While

the machine is ringing, you can pick up the telephone and then talk if the call is from a telephone, or you can receive a fax manually if the call is from a fax machine.

Fax

4

4 Fax

188

Using Manual ReceiveIf the fax reception mode is set to [Manual Receive] when the machine rings to notify of an incoming call, pick up the receiver of the external telephone or select [On-hook] on the screen that appears.Note • We recommend setting the monitor volume to [Loud] when using the On-hook feature. The

volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For information on how to change the default values, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.

1 When the machine rings, the screen appears.

If there is a telephone, pick the receiver up. If not, select [On-hook] on the receiving screen.

2 Confirm whether the call is from a telephone or a fax machine.If the call is from a telephone, use the receiver to talk.If the call is from a fax machine, you will hear the sound of a fax machine.Note • If [On-hook] was selected, you will hear the sound from the machine speaker. However, you

cannot talk to the other party.


4 If you picked up the receiver, put it back in the cradle when the <Online> indicator on the control panel lights up.Important • Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line will remain

"busy".

Using Mailbox ReceiveDocuments received using Mailbox Receive are stored in a mailbox. After receiving a document, the <Job in Memory> indicator lights up and the machine prints a mailbox report. The mailbox number and the mailbox name are printed on the mailbox report.To receive a Mailbox Receive document using F Code transmission, notify the sender of the following information:

F Code (sub-address): 0 (represents F Code transmission) and the storage mailbox number.

Password (if necessary): the passcode of the mailbox in which the document is stored.

Note • Mailbox reception using the DTMF method is possible, but the only signals that can be received are numerals, *, and #.

Depending on the report print settings, a mailbox report may not be printed even if there is a received document in the mailbox. For more information on the Mailbox Report settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Mailbox Report" in the Administrator Guide.For information on how to print a document stored in a mailbox, refer to "Printing Documents in a Mailbox" (P.246)".

Facsimile Information Services

189

Fax

4

Facsimile Information Services

For information on subscriptions and advanced operating procedures, contact the corresponding facsimile information service.

Using the Receiver

1 Pick up the telephone receiver.

2 Select [Manual Receive] from the drop-down menu.

3 Specify the fax number of the facsimile information service.

The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad, address numbers, or one touch buttons. The address book cannot be used.

The call destination can be specified also with the keyboard displayed on the screen. Pressing [More Characters] on the screen displays symbols.

Note • When the line type is set to a pulse line, [Tone (:)] does not appear.• If you want to send tones (or to use the touch-tone services) while using a pulse line, select

[Tone (:)].• Some touch-tone services may not be available even if you set your telephone to send

tones.

4 When the machine connects to the service, you will hear voice prompts. Follow the voice prompts to enter the required numbers.

5 When input is finished, press the <Start> button.Note • The <Online> indicator on the control panel lights and reception begins.

6 Place the receiver back in the cradle.Important • Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line will remain

"busy".

Fax

4

4 Fax

190

When Not Using a Receiver

1 Adjust the volume of the line monitor.We recommend setting the volume of the line monitor to [Loud] so that it is easy to hear the voice prompts.For information on how to change the volume of the line monitor, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Line Monitor Volume" in the Administrator Guide.

2 Select [On-hook (Manual Send/Receive)] on the [More Options] screen.

3 Select [Manual Receive] from the drop-down menu.

4 Specify the fax number of the facsimile information service.

The call destination can be specified using the numeric keypad address numbers, or one touch buttons. The address book cannot be used.

The call destination can also be specified using the keyboard displayed on the screen.

Note • When the line type is set to a pulse line, [Tone (:)] does not appear. If you want to send tones (or to use the touch-tone services) while using a pulse line, select [Tone (:)]

• Some touch-tone services may not be available even if you set your telephone to send tones.

5 When the machine connects to the service, you will hear voice prompts. Follow the voice prompts to enter the required numbers.

6 When input is finished, press the <Start> button.

5 Scan

This chapter describes the basic scanning procedures and the scan features provided by the machine.Note • The scan features are not available for some models. To use the features, an

optional package will be necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

To use the scan features, network settings are required. For information on the network settings, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Scanning Procedure .................................................................................192

Operations during Scanning .....................................................................198

E-mail........................................................................................................201

Scan to Mailbox ........................................................................................208

Network Scanning.....................................................................................209

Scan to PC................................................................................................211

General Scan Features.............................................................................215

Advanced Settings....................................................................................225

Layout Adjustment ....................................................................................228

E-mail Options/Filing Options ...................................................................234

5 Scan

192

Scan

5

Scanning Procedure

This section describes the basic scanning procedure. The following shows the reference section for each step.

Step 1 Loading Documents .......................................................................................................192Step 2 Selecting Features ..........................................................................................................194Step 3 Starting the Scan Job......................................................................................................195Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job Status ..........................................................................197Step 5 Saving the Scanned Data ...............................................................................................197



Multiple sheets

Document Glass

Single sheet


Document FeederThe document feeder supports single and multiple sheet documents with sizes from 139.7 x 210 mm (A5, 5.5 x 8.5 inches) to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).The document feeder automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.For information about document sizes that can be detected automatically, or how to enter variable sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.230)".The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information about paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The document feeder accepts the following number of sheets.

Important • To avoid paper jams, use the document glass for folded or creased documents.• Two sided scanning of lightweight paper 38 - 49 g/m2 is not supported.

For information about scanning mixed sized documents, refer to "Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously)" (P.230).





Scanning Procedure

193

Scan

5


2 Place the documents face up (when the documents are 2-sided, place the front side up) in the center of the document feederNote • In normal occasions, load the document

in the [Head to Left] orientation. When viewing the scanned document on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Head to Top] orientation.

• The indicator lights up when the document is loaded correctly.

3 Adjust the movable document guides to match the size of the document loaded.

Document GlassThe document glass supports a single sheet, a book, or other similar documents up to 297 x 432 mm (A3, 11 x 17 inches).Important • After using the document glass, close the document cover.

The document glass automatically detects standard size documents. For non-standard size documents, input the size in the [Original Size] screen.For information about document sizes that can be detected automatically, or how to enter variable sizes, refer to "Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.230)".The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.




Indicator

5 Scan

194

Scan

5


3 Close the document cover.

Step 2 Selecting FeaturesOn the [All Services] screen, you can select from 4 scan modes: E-mail, Scan to Mailbox, Network Scanning, and Scan to PC. You can select features on each mode.Note • Features displayed may vary depending on the model of your machine.

• When the Auditron mode used, a user ID and passcode may be required. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

• To use the scan features, network settings are required. For information on the network settings, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

E-mailScans a document, and sends the scanned data as an e-mail attachment after converting the data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Docuworks, or XPS.

Scan to MailboxScans a document and saves the scanned data into a mailbox on the machine.You need to create a mailbox in advance. For information on how to create a mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

Network ScanningScans a document using a job template created on CentreWare Internet Services.

Scan to PCScans a document and sends the scanned data to a network computer via the FTP or SMB protocol.

The following describes how to store scanned data into a mailbox.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C


Scanning Procedure

195

Scan

5

2 Select [Scan to Mailbox].


4 Select each tab, and configure features as necessary.

The following shows the reference section for each feature."General Scan Features" (P.215)"Advanced Settings" (P.225)"Layout Adjustment" (P.228)"E-mail Options/Filing Options" (P.234)

Step 3 Starting the Scan JobThe following describes how to start a scan job.



• Scanning cannot be performed if a copy protection code is detected.

Note • If a problem occurs, an error message appears in the touch screen. Solve the problem in accordance with the message.

• The next scan job can proceed while scanning.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Clear All> button

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Start> button

5 Scan

196

Scan

5

If you have more documentsIf you have more documents to scan, select [Next Original] on the touch screen while the current document is being scanned. This allows you to scan the documents as a single set of data.Up to 999 pages can be stored.Note • If the number of document pages exceeds the maximum, then scanning stops. Follow the

displayed message, and either abort the operation, or save the scanned data.

2 While documents are being scanned, select [Next Original].

Note • When using the document feeder, load the next document after the machine has finished scanning the first document.

• When the screen shown above is displayed and no operation is performed for a certain period of time, the machine automatically assumes that there are no more documents.

• You can change the scan settings of the next document by selecting the [Change Settings] button that is displayed after selecting [Next Original].


4 Press the <Start> button. If you have more documents, repeat Steps 3 and 4.


Scanning Procedure

197

Scan

5

Step 4 Confirming the Scan Job in Job StatusThe following describes how to confirm the status of a scan job.



From the pull-down menu, you can select and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).


Step 5 Saving the Scanned DataWhen you used the Scan-to-Mailbox feature, the document stored in a mailbox of the machine can be imported into your computer using the following:

Import using an applicationUse a network scan driver.Refer to "Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application" (P.314).

Import using Mailbox Viewer 3Use Mailbox Viewer 3 (Fuji Xerox application software).Refer to "Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3" (P.316).

Import using CentreWare Internet ServicesUse CentreWare Internet Services.Refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.318).

Import using EasyOperatorUse EasyOperator.Refer to "Importing Using EasyOperator" (P.320).

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Job Status> button

5 Scan

198

Scan

5

Operations during Scanning

The following describes the operations available during scanning. The following shows the reference for each operation.

Stopping the Scan Job ...............................................................................................................198Changing Scan Settings ............................................................................................................199

Stopping the Scan JobTo cancel scanning a document, follow the procedure below.


2 Select [Cancel].

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Stop> button

Operations during Scanning

199

Scan

5



2 Select the job to cancel, and then select [Stop].Note • If you cancel the job, scanned data stored

in the mailbox will also be deleted.

Changing Scan SettingsYou can change scan settings while scanning the document.

1 Select [Next Original].

2 Select [Change Settings...].

3 Set [Color Scanning], [Original Type], [Image Options], [Resolution], [2 Sided Scanning], and [Original size]."Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)" (P.215). "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.217)."Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness)" (P.226)."Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)" (P.228).

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Job Status> button

5 Scan

200

Scan

5

"2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.228)."Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)" (P.230).


E-mail

201

Scan

5

E-mail

The following describes how to select features on the [E-mail] screen.You can scan a document and send the scanned data as an e-mail attachment after converting the data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address) ....................................................................... 201New Recipient (Entering an Address)...................................................................................... 204Add Me (Adding the Sender’s Address) .................................................................................. 205Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient)............................................................................................ 205From (Setting the Sender’s Address) ....................................................................................... 206Subject (Setting the Subject) .................................................................................................... 207Message (Entering the E-mail Body) ....................................................................................... 207

The [Read Receipts] and [Split Send] features on the [Output Format] screen are only available for the [E-mail] feature. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts) .............................................................................. 235Split Send (Sending in Sections) .............................................................................................. 235

Note • This feature is not available for some models. An optional package is necessary to use the feature. For details, contact our Customer Support Center.

Some e-mail settings are required to use this feature. For information on configuring scanner, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [E-mail] on the [All Services] screen.

2 On the [E-mail] screen, specify recipients using the Address Book or the keyboard.Important • You can only specify recipients registered

for e-mail.• Recipients cannot be specified with

address numbers using the numeric keypad, one-touch buttons, or group numbers.

• Depending on the settings in the System Settings, the [New Recipient], and [Add Me] buttons are not displayed.

Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address)The following describes how to select a recipient using the Address Book.When sending an encrypted e-mail, select an e-mail address associated with a valid certificate from the Address Book.To use this feature, an e-mail address associated with a certificate for S/MIME must be registered in the Address Book. For information on the Address Book, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.To encrypt an e-mail, prior settings are required. For information on the settings, refer to "12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.To verify invalidity of a certificate, prior settings are required. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Security Settings" > "Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings" in the Administrator Guide.Note • While displaying the Address Book, if a message indicating "Validating..." appears on the

screen, you can not start a scan job until the message disappears.

5 Scan

202

Scan

5


2 From the [Address Books] list, select [List all public entries], [Search Public], or [Search Network].Note • When specifying multiple recipients,

specify them continuously.

3 Select a recipient from the address list, and then select [To], [CC], or [BCC].

4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 as necessary.

List all public entriesDisplays the local address list.Refer to "When [List all public entries] is Selected" (P.203).

Search PublicSearches recipients in the local address list.Refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected" (P.203).

Search NetworkSearches recipients in the remote address list.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.Refer to "When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected" (P.203).

Name/E-mail AddressLists names and their e-mail addresses.

ToSets the selected address as a recipient.

CCSets the selected address as CC.

BCCSets the selected address as BCC.

DetailsDisplays detailed information on the selected recipient.

Show E-mail AddressPlacing a check mark in the box displays only e-mail addresses in the list.

E-mail

203

Scan

5

When [List all public entries] is Selected

1 Select a recipient from the local address list.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous


When [Search Public] or [Search Network] is Selected

1 Enter keywords to search for an address.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).Note • When multiple keywords are used, the

address is searched with the AND clause.• The screen on the right appears when

[Search Public] is selected.

NameSearches with a recipient name as a keyword. Selecting [Keyword] displays the screen for entering the keyword. Up to 32 characters are allowed.Example: John Smith

E-mail AddressSearches with an e-mail address as a keyword. Selecting [Keyword] displays the screen for entering the keyword. Up to 128 characters are allowed.Example: [email protected]

Custom ItemThis field is used to search with a keyword item other than the recipient name and e-mail address. Selecting [Enter/Change Keyword] displays the screen listing the custom items.Note • Only one custom item can be selected.

NoneNo custom item is used for the keyword search.

telephonenumberA telephone number is used for the keyword search.

oAn office name is used for the keyword search.

ouA department name is used for the keyword search.

5 Scan

204

Scan

5

Change SettingsSelect a custom item, and select this button. Then the keyword entry screen appears. Up to 60 characters are allowed.

KeywordSelect a keyword item, and then enter the keyword.

SearchThe search starts. The searched results are listed on the screen.

New Recipient (Entering an Address)You can enter addresses using the keyboard.

1 Select [New Recipient] on the [E-mail] screen.

2 Use the keyboard shown on the screen to enter an e-mail address of up to 128 characters.

To/CC/BCCSwitches the recipient type (To/CC/BCC) using the drop-down menu.

+ AddAllows you to specify e-mail addresses to send e-mails to multiple recipients (Broadcast).

Search for namesPlacing a check mark in the box searches for names.

Delete TextDeletes entered text.

BackspaceMoves the cursor back to delete one character.

ShiftUsed for entering uppercase characters.

More CharactersDisplays symbols. Use this button to enter symbols for the e-mail address.

E-mail

205

Scan

5

Add Me (Adding the Sender’s Address)This button is used to add the sender's address to [To], [CC], or [BCC].

1 Select [Add Me].

2 Select an option.

ToAdds the sender's address to To.

CCAdds the sender's address to CC.

BCCAdds the sender's address to BCC.

Recipient(s) (Editing a Recipient)You can confirm, delete or edit recipients using the pop-up menu displayed.

1 From the [Recipient(s)] list, select the recipient to be deleted, confirmed, or edited.


RemoveRemoves the selected recipient.

EditDisplays the [Change Recipient Settings] screen where you can confirm or edit the recipient. Refer to "[Edit Recipient] Screen" (P.205).


[Edit Recipient] ScreenYou can confirm and change the settings of the recipient.

1 Select the item to be changed.

2 Select [Change Settings].

E-mail AddressTo change the e-mail address, select [Change Settings] to display the keyboard and enter a new address.

5 Scan

206

Scan

5

NameTo change the recipient name, select [Change Settings] to display the keyboard and enter a new name.The recipient name appears when registered in the Address Book.

S/MIME CertificateTo check whether or not any certificate is linked to the e-mail address, select [Change Settings].If S/MIME is enabled, and a certificate is linked to the e-mail address, you can check the contents of the S/MIME certificate.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.For information on S/MIME communication, refer to "12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.

Change SettingsYou can change recipients, or confirm S/MIME certificates.

From (Setting the Sender’s Address)Specify a sender's e-mail address. You can specify only one address as a sender's address.Note • When using the Authentication feature, the e-mail address registered in user information is

automatically set as a sender's address. For more information on user information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" in the Administrator Guide.

• Depending on the System Settings, [From] may not be editable. • When using a digital signature, the machine e-mail address becomes the sender’s address.

For information on a digital signature, refer to "12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" > "Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [From].


Address BookAllows you to select the sender's e-mail address from the address book.For information on the address book, refer to "Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book)" (P.212).

KeyboardEnter the sender’s e-mail address of up to 128 characters.


E-mail

207

Scan

5

Subject (Setting the Subject)Set the e-mail subject using the following procedure.

Auto SetAutomatically sets the subject to [Scan data from XXX] (where XXX is the host name of the machine).

To set a user-defined subject

1 Select [Subject].

2 Enter a subject of up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).

Message (Entering the E-mail Body)Enter the e-mail body using the following procedure.

1 Select [Message].

2 Enter a message of up to 512 characters using the keyboard.


Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)You can set the output color to scan a document.For information about the feature, refer to "Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)" (P.215).

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)You can automatically scan both sides of a 2-sided document.By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.For information about the feature, refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.216).

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)You can select the type of the document.For information about the feature, refer to "Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)" (P.217).

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)You can select a file format for output data.For information about the feature, refer to "File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)" (P.218).

5 Scan

208

Scan

5

Scan to Mailbox

The following describes the procedure to select features on the [Scan to Mailbox] screen. You can scan documents and save the scanned data into a mailbox of the machine. The following explains the [Scan to Mailbox] screen.A mailbox needs to be registered beforehand. For more information on registering a mailbox, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Scan to Mailbox] on the [All Services] screen.

2 Select a feature on the [Scan to Mailbox] screen.Note • If a passcode is set for the mailbox, the

passcode entry screen may appear. Enter the passcode and select [Enter]. If you have forgotten the passcode, set the mailbox passcode in the System Administration mode again.

MailboxSelect a mailbox to save the scanned data in.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen.

Go toUse the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit mailbox number. The mailbox then appears at the top of the list.

Document ListSelect a mailbox and then select this button to display the [Document List] screen. You can confirm or delete documents stored in the mailbox.For more information on the [Document List] screen, refer to "Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents" (P.241).




Network Scanning

209

Scan

5

Network Scanning

The following describes the procedure to select features on the Network Scanning screen. On the Network Scanning screen, you can scan documents after specifying a file (job template) saving scanning conditions, information on the forwarding destination server and others.This feature creates job templates on a computer using CentreWare Internet Services. Scanned data is converted to the format specified in a job template, and is automatically sent to a server. The machine allows you to automatically retrieve job templates stored in a server. The following explains the [Network Scanning] screen.Note • If characters not supported by the machine are used in names or description of job flow

sheets, the characters will not be displayed or will be garbled on the screen. For information on characters available for use, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Notes and Restrictions" > "Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine" in the Administrator Guide.

• This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

When Scan to Home is enabled, and when the Access Remote feature is available, the scanned document can be transferred to a different destination based on an authenticated user.Important • When using the Scan to Home feature in computer environment earlier than Windows 98

NT, a destination user name in the earlier format (domain name\user name) will not be determined automatically.Before scanning, change the user name with which you can log in correctly.

Note • You can configure Scan to Home from CentreWare Internet Services.For information on how to use CentreWare Internet Services, refer to the online help of CentreWare Internet Services.

1 Select [Network Scanning] on the [All Services] screen.

2 Select a job template.

Job TemplateSelect a job template that has the scan conditions you want.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Go toUse the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit job template number. The job template then appears at the top of the list.

Template DescriptionDisplays the [Template Description] screen. The screen displays the description of the job template. This applies only when the description has been added to a job template.

Update TemplatesRefreshes the information. If a created job template has not been displayed, selecting [Refresh] will display the job template.

5 Scan

210

Scan

5





Scan to PC

211

Scan

5

Scan to PC

You can convert scanned data to TIFF, JPEG, PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS format, and then use the FTP or SMB protocol to send the data to a computer on the network. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Transfer Protocol...................................................................................................................... 211Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book).................................. 212Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network).................................... 212Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen Keyboard) ............ 213


• Before scanning, a shared folder must be created on the computer for saving scanned data. If the FTP protocol is used, the FTP service must be set. For information on the computer settings, refer to the documentation supplied with your operating system. For information on compatible operating systems, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Specifications" > "Scan Function" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Scan to PC] from the [All Services] screen.

2 Specify a forwarding destination on the [Scan to PC] screen.Note • Fields displayed vary depending on the

protocol.

Transfer ProtocolYou can select a transfer protocol using the following procedure.

1 Select [Transfer Protocol].

2 Select any item.

FTPTransfers using the FTP protocol.

SMBTransfers using the SMB protocol.

SMB (UNC Format)Transfers using the SMB protocol (UNC Format).UNC stands for Universal Naming Convention and its format is as follows:\\host name\shared name\directory name

5 Scan

212

Scan

5

Address Book (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Address Book)You can specify the server name, user name and other information from the address book.For information on settings of the address book, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.To verify invalidation of a certificate, prior settings are required. For the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Security Settings" > "Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings" in the Administrator Guide.Note • While displaying the Address Book, if a message indicating "Validating..." appears on the

screen, you can not start a scan job until the message disappears.


2 Select the destination in which data is to be stored.

3 Select [Add].Important • You can only use destinations configured

for SMB or FTP. You cannot use destinations for faxes, e-mails or Internet Faxes.

Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen.

Name ProtocolLists recipient names and protocols.

AddAdds a selected recipient to the [Save In] box.

Save inDisplays a selected recipient.

DetailsYou can confirm information such as [Name] and [Server Name/IP Address].

Browse... (Specifying a Destination PC by Browsing Your Network)Displays a hierarchy consisting of server names and folders. You can specify a save destination by tracing the hierarchy.

1 Select [Browse...].

2 Select the destination in which data is to be stored.You can move to another level by pressing [Previous] or [Next].Important • You can specify recipients for SMB only.

Save inShows the current location in the hierarchy.

Scan to PC

213

Scan

5

Specifying a Destination (Specifying a Destination PC Using the Screen Keyboard)

Enter information into the fields provided for the selected protocol, to specify a forwarding destination.

1 Select the item to be set.Note • You can also select [Address Book] to

enter information.• Fields displayed on the screen vary

depending on the protocol.

2 Enter information using the keyboard on the screen.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).Note • To delete characters, select [Backspace].

ServerDisplayed when [FTP] or [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]. Enter a server name or IP address. Up to 64 characters are allowed.Example:myhost.example.com(myhost: host name, example.com: domain name)

Shared NameDisplayed when [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]. Enter a shared name. Up to 64 characters are allowed.

Save InDisplayed when [FTP] or [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol]: Enter a directory name. Up to 128 characters are allowed.

When [SMB(UNC format) is selected for [Transfer Protocol]:Enter "\\Host Name\Shared Name\Directory Name". Up to 260 characters are allowed.

User NameEnter the user name of the computer you are forwarding to. When a user name is not required for the destination, this field can be skipped.When [FTP] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], up to 97 characters are allowed.When [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], use one of the following formats.

For Active Directory:User name@Domain name (user name: up to 32 characters, domain name: up to 64 characters)Example: [email protected] (fuji: user name, example.com: domain name)

5 Scan

214

Scan

5

For Windows NT Domain:Domain name\User name (domain name: up to 64 characters, user name: up to 32 characters)Example: example\fuji (example: domain name, fuji: user name)

For workgroups:Local user (up to 32 characters)Example: Fuji-Taro

PasswordEnter the password for the user name. Up to 32 characters are allowed.





General Scan Features

215

Scan

5


The [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], and [Scan to PC] screens allow you to set basic features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color) ........................................................................... 2152 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document) ........................................................ 216Original Type (Selecting the Document Type) ........................................................................ 217File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)............................................................ 218

Note • When you select [Scan to Mailbox], [File Format] is disabled.

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning] or [Scan to PC].

2 On the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Network Scanning]/[Scan to PC] screen, select a feature.

Color Scanning (Selecting an Output Color)You can set the output color to scan a document.Note • [Black & White] cannot be selected when [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is

set to [Searchable] and [MRC High Compression] is set to [On].• [Black & White] can only be selected when [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is

set to [Searchable] and [MRC High Compression] is set to [Off].

1 Select a color mode from [Color Scanning].

Auto DetectThe color of the document is determined automatically; the machine scans in full color when the document is colored, otherwise scans in monochrome.Note • The features which can be set in the [Advanced Settings] screen when [Auto Detect] is

selected, are the same as if [Color] is specified for the [Color Scanning] when a color document is loaded, or the same as if [Black & White] is specified for the [Color Scanning] when a monochrome document is loaded.

ColorSelect to scan a color document.

Black & WhiteScans a document in monochrome 2 tone. You can select the document type in the [Original Type].

5 Scan

216

Scan

5

Note • When [MRC High Compression] is set to [On] in [Output Format], you cannot select [Black & White].

GrayscaleScans a document in grayscale. Adds shades to monochrome, creating intermediate tones that change gradually. Suited to documents containing gradations that cannot be reproduced with monochrome (2-color).

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)Allows you to scan a 1-sided or 2-sided document on one or both sides of paper.By setting the binding style, both sides are scanned in the same orientation.

1 Select any item.

1 SidedSelect this to scan only one side of the document.

2 Sided (Head to Head)Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in the same orientation.

2 Sided (Head to Toe)Select this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in opposite orientations.

More...The [2 Sided Scanning] screen is displayed.Refer to "[2 Sided Scanning] Screen" (P.216).

[2 Sided Scanning] ScreenThis screen allows you to select the status and orientation of original documents.

1 Select any item.

1 SidedSelect this to scan only one side of the document.


217

Scan

5

2 SidedSelect this to scan both sides of the document.

OriginalsDisplayed when [2 Sided] is selected.

Head to HeadSelect this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in the same orientation.

Head to ToeSelect this when both sides of the 2-sided document are in opposite orientations.

Original OrientationTo scan using the document feeder, the orientation must be set to specify the head of the document.Load the document in the [Sideway Images] orientation when [File Format] is set to [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [TIFF], or [JPEG]. When viewing the scanned document on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation.Note • If the setting for [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the

machine may mistakenly detect the top of the document.


Sideways ImagesSelect this when placing the top edge of the document against the left side of the document glass or the document feeder.

Original Type (Selecting the Document Type)When you set [Color Scanning] to [Black & White], select the document type.

1 Select an original type.

Photo & TextSelect this item when the scanning document contains both text and photos. This setting automatically identifies text and photo areas to scan each area with optimum quality.

TextSelect this item when scanning text clearly.

PhotoSelect this item when scanning photos.Note • [Photo] cannot be selected when [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is set to

[Searchable].

5 Scan

218

Scan

5

File Format (Selecting a File Format for Output Data)You can select a file format for output data.Note • When [Scan to Mailbox] is selected, [File Format] is disabled.

• If High-compression Image Kit is installed, the machine can store PDF and DocuWorks files with higher compression rates.

1 Select a file format.

TIFF/JPEG Auto SelectAutomatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page: [JPEG] for full-color and grayscale pages, and [TIFF] for monochrome pages.

PDFSaves scanned data in PDF format.Note • The version of the output PDF files is Adobe®Acrobat® 4.0 (PDF 1.3).

DocuWorksSaves scanned data in DocuWorks format.Note • To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.

- DocuWorks 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4.0 or later

More...The [File Format] screen is displayed.Refer to "[File Format] Screen" (P.218).

[File Format] ScreenThis screen displays all available File Format options.

1 Select any item.

TIFF/JPEG Auto SelectAutomatically selects JPEG or TIFF. The file format is determined for each page: [JPEG] for full-color and grayscale pages, and [TIFF] for monochrome pages.


219

Scan

5

mTIFF - Multiple Pages per FileSaves multiple pages into a single file in TIFF format.

TIFF - File for Each PageSaves each page into a different file in TIFF format.

JPEG - File for Each PageSaves as a JPEG file. When either [Color] or [Grayscale] is selected for [Color Scanning], configure the image compression method. You can also configure the compression ratio with [Quality/File Size] in the [Output Format] screen.

PDF Images Multiple Pages per FileSaves scanned data in PDF format.Note • The version of the output PDF files is Adobe®Acrobat® 4.0 (PDF 1.3).

DocuWorksSaves scanned data in DocuWorks format.Note • To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.

- DocuWorks 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light 4.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 4.0 or later

XPSSaves scanned data in XPS format.

Compression MethodAllows you to select a compression method for scanned image data.

MRC High CompressionAllows you to save PDF, DocuWorks, and XPS files with high compression, and also to attach thumbnails to DocuWorks and XPS files. A thumbnail is a reduced, small file image that helps you check the file contents.Important • Creating thumbnail images increases the size of the output data. Check the data size before

you send it by e-mail.• DocuWorks 5.0.x and earlier versions (including trial version) do not support high-

compressed DocuWorks files.

Note • Some models require an optional kit to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• To browse or print DocuWorks files on a computer, one of the following software is required.- DocuWorks 6.0 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light 5.1 or later- DocuWorks Viewer Light for Web 5.1 or later

Searchable TextSelect whether to perform character recognition in PDF and DocuWorks files.Important • Note the following when [Searchable Text] is set to [Searchable].

- When the text on the document is small (10 points or smaller), scan the document with high resolution (300 dpi).

- Color scanning is recommended when the document has outlined white text, or when it has text placed on a dark background.

- In the following cases, the Searchable Text feature may not function properly.- If the document is not loaded correctly and thus the text is slanted, or if the text on the

document is in different orientations- If the text on the document is decorated (italic, hatching, strike-through, etc.)

5 Scan

220

Scan

5

- If the document has background patterns or noise- If the text on the document is handwritten

Note • Some models require an optional kit to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

PDF SecurityAllows you to prevent the data saved as a PDF file from unauthorized access.The [File Format - PDF Security] screen appears.Refer to "[File Format - PDF Security] Screen" (P.221).

PDF SignatureThe [File Format - PDF Signature] screen appears.A digital signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or to prevent impersonation of the sender.To verify the signature with Adobe Acrobat, select [Digital Signatures] under [Preferences] on Acrobat, and then select the following option for [Signing Method].

- Acrobat 6.0.x : Windows Digital Certificate Security- Acrobat 7.0.x : Adobe Default Security

OffNo visible signature is added.

Visible SignatureAdds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.

Invisible SignatureAdds an invisible digital signature using the certificate of the machine.

Signature Field LocationSelect the position for [Visible Signature] where the signature is displayed.

Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Optimize PDF For Fast Web ViewOptimizes the PDF file so that it is displayed faster on a web browser.

DocuWorks SecurityAllows you to configure security on the data saved as a DocuWorks file to prevent unauthorized access.The [File Format - DocuWorks Security] screen appears.Refer to "[File Format - DocuWorks Security] Screen" (P.223).

DocuWorks SignatureThe [File Format - DocuWorks Signature] screen appears.A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or prevent impersonation of the sender.


OnAdds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.

Signature Field LocationSelect the position where the signature is displayed.


221

Scan

5


XPS SignatureThe [File Format - XPS Signature] screen appears.A visible signature added to a file enables to detect alterations in the file, or prevent impersonation of the sender.


OnAdds a visible signature using the certificate of the machine.


[File Format - PDF Security] ScreenAllows you to encrypt a PDF file by password, and assign the access privileges for the file operation.

1 Select any item.

OffThe file is not encrypted, and no access privilege is configured.

PasswordEncrypts the file using a password.

Encryption AlgorithmSet the encryption method.

128-bit RC4Encrypts by the 128-bit RC4 method. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with Adobe® Acrobat® 5.0 or later.

Important • When encrypted by the 128-bit RC4 method, and [PDF Signature] is selected, files can be opened only with Adobe® Acrobat® 6.0 or later.

128-bit AESEncrypts by the 128-bit AES method. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with Adobe® Acrobat® 7.0 or later.

Supported VersionThe supported versions of Adobe® Acrobat® for encryption are displayed.

Document Open PasswordThe [PDF Security - Document Open Password] screen appears.If you select [On] and set a password, the password is required to open the file.You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

5 Scan

222

Scan

5

PermissionsThe [PDF Security - Permissions] screen appears.Refer to "[PDF Security - Permissions] Screen" (P.222).

[PDF Security - Permissions] ScreenAllows you to assign access privileges to a file.

1 Select [Security Password].

2 Select [On].

3 Select [Keyboard], enter the security password, and select [Save].

4 Likewise, reenter the security password, and select [Save].

5 Select any item

Security PasswordThe [PDF Security - Security Password] screen appears.Security Password allows to assign access privileges to files. The password is required when changing the access privileges or performing unauthorized operations.You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

PrintingThe [Authorization - Printing] screen appears.Configure whether to allow printing the file. If allowed, select the print resolution as well.

Changes AllowedThe [Authorization - Changes Allowed] screen appears.Configure whether to allow changing the file contents such as inserting pages or adding notes.

Allow Contents Copying and ExtractionThe [Authorization - Allow Contents Copying and Extraction] screen appears. Configure whether to allow copying the file contents such as text and images.

Text Editing by Screen ReaderThe [Text Editing by Screen Reader] screen appears. Configure whether to allow using application software that reads out displayed documents for the visually handicapped.


223

Scan

5

[File Format - DocuWorks Security] ScreenAllows you to encrypt a Docuworks file with a password, and assign the access privileges for the file operation.

1 Select any item.

OffThe file is not encrypted, and no access privilege is configured.

Password (V4 Compatible)Encrypts the file by the 56 bit DES method using a password. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver4.0 or later.Select [Open Password], and set a password.

Password (V4 Incompatible)Encrypts the file by the 128 bit AES method using password. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver5.0 or later.Select [Open Password], and set a password.

Digital Certificate (V4 Incompatible)Encrypts the file by the 128 bit AES method using certificate. Files encrypted by this method can be opened with DocuWorks Ver.5.0 or later.Select [Certificate] to set a certificate.Important • If you encrypt a file using a certificate without Basic Constraints, DocuWorks Ver.5.0.1 and

Ver.6.0.1 cannot open the file. To use such certificates, use DocuWorks Ver.5.0.2, or Ver.6.0.2 or later.

Encryption AlgorithmDisplays the encryption methods.

Restricted OperationsSelect file operations to whom access privileges are assigned. When assigning access privileges, configure [Full Access Password].

Open PasswordThe [DocuWorks Security - Open Password] screen appears.If you select [On] and set a password, the file is encrypted. To open the file, the password is required. The access privileges set in [Restricted Operations] are assigned.You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

Full Access PasswordThe [DocuWorks Security - Full Access Password] screen appears.When setting a password, the password is required to change the access privileges set in [Restricted Operations].You can enter a password up to 32 characters.

5 Scan

224

Scan

5

CertificateThe [DocuWorks Security - Certificate] screen appears.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.Refer to "[DocuWorks Security - Certificate] Screen" (P.224).

[DocuWorks Security - Certificate] ScreenAllows you to select parties to whom the encrypted file is disclosed, and addresses to which privileges are assigned.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Grant full access to this documentDisplayed only when [List all public entries] is selected.Configure certificates of persons who are allowed to change access privileges including editing or operating the file (full access).

List all public entriesDisplays the local address list.For information on Local Search, refer to "List all public entries" (P.202).

Search PublicSearches recipients in the local address list.For information on Local Search, refer to "Search Public" (P.202).

Search NetworkFor information on Remote Search (Directory Svc.), refer to "Search Public" (P.202).For information on Directory Service, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Remote Authentication/Directory Service" > "LDAP Server/Directory Service Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Name/E-mail Address/DNLists names and their e-mail addresses.

Certificate DetailsThe [Certificate Details] screen appears.Certificate information including issuer, expiration date, persons to whom the certificate is issued, and the like is displayed.

AddDisplayed only when [List all public entries] is selected.Enter a recipient number using the numeric keypad to display the recipient on the list.

Advanced Settings

225

Scan

5

Advanced Settings

On the [Advanced Settings] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can set the image quality features. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph) ........................................................................... 225Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness).............................................. 226Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast)...... 226Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background) ............................................. 227Color Space (Specifying Color Space)..................................................................................... 227

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning] or [Scan to PC].

2 Select the [Advanced Settings] tab, and select a feature on the [Advanced Settings] screen.Note • [Color Space] is not available for some

models. An optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

• A setting must be made in the System Administration mode to activate [Color Space]. For information on the setting procedure, refer to "Color Space (Specifying Color Space)" (P.227) and "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space" in the Administrator Guide.

Photographs (Scanning a Color Photograph)Configure when scanning a color photograph.This feature is only available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color].Important • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature.

• When this feature is enabled, the [Shadow Suppression] and [Background Suppression] features cannot be used.

1 Select [Photographs].

2 Select [Enhance Photographs].

5 Scan

226

Scan

5

Image Options (Adjusting Scan Density and Image Sharpness)You can adjust the scan density and image sharpness.

1 Select [Image Options].

2 Adjust the scan density and sharpness with [ ] and [ ].

Lighten/DarkenYou can select a scan density level from among 7 levels between [Lighten] and [Darken].Moving the arrow mark to the upper position makes the scan density lighter, and moving to the lower position makes darker.

SharpnessYou can select a sharpness level from 5 levels between [Soften] and [Sharpen]. Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the contours of images sharper, and selecting a lower cell makes softer.

Image Enhancement (Erasing the Background Color of Documents/Adjusting Contrast)

This feature allows you to suppress the background color of a document such as newspaper and colored paper. In addition, when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale], you can adjust the contrast.

1 Select [Image Enhancement].

2 Select [Background Suppression] and [Contrast]. Adjust contrast with [ ] and [ ].

Background SuppressionNo SuppressionScans the document backgrounds with no filtering.

Auto SuppressionWhen [Color Scanning] is set to [Black & White], the background of a document printed on colored paper, such as newspaper, will be suppressed.When [Color Scanning] is set to [Color], the background of a document printed on white-color paper will be suppressed.

Advanced Settings

227

Scan

5

ContrastYou can select a contrast level from 5 levels between [Least Contrast] and [Most Contrast].Selecting an upper cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas greater; light areas become lighter and dark areas darker. In contrast, selecting a lower cell on the bar makes the difference between light and dark areas smaller.

Shadow Suppression (Suppressing the Document Background)When you scan a 2-sided document printed on thin paper, this feature allows you to suppress the image and colors on the reverse side of each document page from appearing in the scan image.This feature is enabled only when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].Important • This feature cannot be used with [Photographs].

1 Select [Shadow Suppression].

2 Select [Auto Suppression].

Color Space (Specifying Color Space)This feature allows you to set the color space.Note • Color Space is available when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color].

• To display [Color Space] on the [Layout Adjustment] screen, a setting must be made in the System Administration mode. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Color Space" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Color Space].

2 Select either [sRGB] or [Device Color Space].

sRGBUses the color space that conforms to sYCC.

Device Color SpaceUses advanced color settings.Note • You can find profile data in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

• When [Device Color Space] is selected, the image quality features described below are changed to their defaults. Lighten/Darken, Sharpness, Shadow Suppression, Contrast, Background Suppression

• When [Color Scanning] is set to [Auto Detect], [sRGB] is applied to color pages of the documents.

5 Scan

228

Scan

5

Layout Adjustment

On the [Layout Adjustment] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can adjust the scan options. The following shows the reference section for each feature.

Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution) .......................................................................2282 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document).........................................................228Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets) ..................................................229Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size) .....................................................................................230Mixed Sized Originals (Scanning Different Size Documents Simultaneously) .......................230Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document) .......................................231Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)........................................................................233

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC].


Resolution (Specifying a Scanning Resolution)This feature allows you to set the resolution to scan a document.As the value increases, the scan becomes more detailed, but the data size also increases. The scanning and transfer time increases as well.

1 Select [Resolution].

2 Select a resolution.Note • Select from [200 dpi] or [300 dpi] when

[MRC High Compression] is set to [On] for PDF, DocuWorks or XPS files on the [File Format] screen.

• Select from [200 dpi] or [300 dpi] when [Searchable Text] is set to [Searchable] for PDF or DocuWorks files on the [File Format] screen.

2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)This feature is the same as [2 Sided Scanning] in the [E-mail]/[Scan to Mailbox]/[Network Scanning]/[Scan to PC] tab. Refer to "2 Sided Scanning (Scanning Both Sides of a Document)" (P.216).

Layout Adjustment

229

Scan

5

Book Scanning (Scanning Facing Pages on Separate Sheets)This feature allows you to scan facing pages of a document onto separate sheets of paper in page order.This feature is useful if you need to make separate scans for facing pages of bound originals such as a booklet.Note • You cannot use the document feeder with this feature. Use the document glass.

• Non-standard sized documents will not be separated into two accurately.

1 Select [Book Scanning].

2 Select any item.

OffDoes not scan as a bound document.

Left Page then RightScans the left page and then the right page of facing pages.

Right Page then LeftScans the right page and then the left page of facing pages.

Top Page then BottomScans the top page and then the bottom page of facing pages.

Both PagesScans both pages in page order.

Left Page OnlyScans the left page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Right Page OnlyScans the right page only in page order. You can select this item when [Left Page then Right] or [Right Page then Left] is selected.

Top Page OnlyScans the top page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.

Bottom Page OnlyScans the bottom page only in page order. You can select this item when [Top Page then Bottom] is selected.


5 Scan

230

Scan

5

Original Size (Specifying a Scan Size)This feature allows you to set the scan size for a document.Use this feature when a document is a non-standard size, or when you want to scan a document at a size different from the original size.


2 Select a size.If you select a non-standard size, specify values for the X and Y directions.

Auto DetectDetects the document size automatically. Automatically-detectable sizes are:

Important • If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.

Note • The standard document sizes that can be detected automatically depend on the [Paper Size Settings] in the System Administration mode. For information on the paper size settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Other Settings" > "Paper Size Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Standard SizeSelect from preset sizes.

Variable SizeEnter the desired scan size when scanning a non-standard size document or when scanning at a size different from the original document size. You can specify a value in the range of 15 to 432 mm for the scan length (X), and a value in the range of 15 to 297 mm for the scan width (Y), in 1 mm increments. The scales attached on the upper and left edges of the document glass are helpful for you to specify values.Note • If [MRC High Compression] is enabled for a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS file on the [File

Format] Screen, the variable ranges are 50 to 432 mm for the scan length (X) and 50 to 297 mm for the scan width (Y), in 1 mm increments.


When using the document feeder, you can simultaneously scan different size documents with the respective sizes. You can also specify a size to scan different size documents with the same size.Important • When selecting [Color] for [Color Scanning], and [2 Sided] for [2 Sided Scanning], set the

[Resolution] to a maximum of [400dpi].• Always load the A5-size documents in portrait orientation.• When loading B5 documents together with A3 documents loaded in landscape orientation or

A4 documents loaded in portrait orientation, load the B5 documents in portrait orientation.

Document feeder Document glass

Document size B5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 11" , 11 x 17"

B6, B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5, A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5 x 11"

Layout Adjustment

231

Scan

5

• When upper-left corners of the documents are not aligned properly, they may not be scanned correctly.

• The recommended document size combinations are A4 portrait and A3 landscape, or B5 portrait and B4 landscape. If another combination of document sizes is used, the documents can be fed at an angle and may not be copied properly.

Note • When [Reduce/Enlarge] is set to [Auto %] and the output size is specified for [Output Size], the scanned data is automatically reduced/enlarged to the specified size. However, since the scanned image is not rotated, the image will be reduced/enlarged to fit the specified size while keeping its orientation. For example, when an A3 landscape original is loaded and the output size is set to A4 portrait, the scanned image is reduced to A5 landscape and printed on A4 portrait paper.

• If the document size cannot be detected automatically, a screen to input the document size appears.


2 Select [On].


OnWhen scanning documents of different sizes, the machine automatically detects the size of each document.

Original OrientationIn order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the document must be configured. When the scanned document which was loaded [Sideway Images] is viewed on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine




Edge Erase (Erasing Edges and Margin Shadows in the Document)When you scan a document with the document cover open or when you scan a book, the edges and center margin of the document may be scanned as black shadows. The Edge Erase feature allows you to erase such shadows.Note • For 2-sided originals, the same edge erase amounts are set for the front and back sides.

• If you set [Reduce/Enlarge], the edge erase amounts will be reduced or enlarged in proportion to the ratio you configured.

5 Scan

232

Scan

5

1 Select [Edge Erase].

2 Select [All Edges] or [Parallel Edges].

3 Use [ ] and [ ] to set the erase widths of top and bottom, left and right, and center of the document.

4 Select [Original Orientation].

All EdgesSets the Edge Erase amounts to 2 mm for the top and bottom, and left and right edges.If you do not want to erase edges, select [Parallel Edges] and then specify 0 mm for the required edges.

Parallel EdgesAllows you to specify Edge Erase values.

Top & BottomErases the shadows of top and bottom edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left & RightErases the shadows of left and right edges of the document in accordance with the orientation of the loaded document. You can set the edge erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

CenterErases the shadow in the center of facing pages of a bound document. You can set the center erase width within the range from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Original OrientationIn order to identify the top of the document, the orientation of the document must be configured. When the scanned document which was loaded [Sideway Images] is viewed on a computer, the document is displayed in the [Upright Images] orientation.Note • If the [Original Orientation] differs from the actual document orientation, then the machine




Layout Adjustment

233

Scan

5

Reduce/Enlarge (Specifying a Scanning Ratio)This feature allows you to set the scanning ratio for the document to be scanned.Note • When [Searchable Text] on the [File Format] screen is set to [Searchable], [Reduce/Enlarge]

is 100%.

1 Select [Reduce/Enlarge].

2 Select or enter a ratio.

Proportional %Select a preset ratio, or enter a value within the range of 25 to 400% in 1% increments.To enter a value, touch the entry box, and then use the numeric keypad or the [ ] and [ ] buttons. You can change settings to display scanning ratios other than [100%]. For information on how to set, refer to "5 Tools" > "Scan Service Settings" > "Reduce/Enlarge Presets" in the Administrator Guide.

Enter Output SizeIn [Output Size], select the output size of the scanned document. The machine automatically calculates the scanning ratio based on the selected output size and the original document size.Note • Selecting [Auto %] may generate blank

margin areas.

100 %Scans at the same image size as the original document.

Proportional %Selects from preset ratios.

5 Scan

234

Scan

5

E-mail Options/Filing Options

On the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] screen under [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC], you can configure the output formats. For more information, refer to below.

Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning) ........................234Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts)...............................................................................235Split Send (Sending in Sections)...............................................................................................235File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent)............................................................236Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address) ...................................................................................236File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict)..........................237Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved)...............................................237Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME)...............................................................237Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)...............................238Login Name...............................................................................................................................238Password ...................................................................................................................................238Meta Data..................................................................................................................................238

1 On the [All Services] screen, select [E-mail], [Scan to Mailbox], [Network Scanning], or [Scan to PC].

2 Select the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] tab, and then select a feature on the [E-mail Options]/[Filing Options] screen. Note • The buttons displayed on the screen

depend on the scan service selected on the [All Services] screen. The screen on the right is for the [E-mail] feature.

Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio When Scanning)

This feature allows you to select an image compression level. The setting is effective when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].

1 Select [Quality/File Size].

2 Adjust Quality/File Size with [ ] and [ ].Note • If High-compression Image Kit is

installed, and when [PDF High Compression] is selected for [Output Format], three image compression levels are available.

Small File SizeThe image is saved with high compression. Image quality degrades, but the file size decreases.

Large File SizeThe image is saved with low compression. Image quality improves, but the file size increases.


235

Scan

5

Read Receipts (Specifying Read Receipts)This feature allows you to receive read receipts from e-mail recipients when using the [E-mail] feature. This feature is not available unless recipients support the MDN feature.Note • This feature is displayed only when [Tools] > [System Settings] > [E-mail/Internet Fax

Settings] > [Read Receipts] > [E-mail Control] is set to [On].• When multiple e-mails are sent using [Split Send], then a read receipt is requested for each

e-mail.• Read receipts are returned to the address specified in [Reply To], or they are returned to the

address specified in [From] if [Reply To] is not set.• This feature is only available when the recipient also sets to return read receipts.

1 Select [Read Receipts].

2 Select [On].

OffSelect this item when you do not request read receipts.

OnSelect this when you request read receipts.

Split Send (Sending in Sections)When you use the [E-mail] feature and the size of the data to be attached is large, you can split the data at page breaks or by a certain data size and then send the data.For information about the Split Send setting, refer to "5 Tools" > "E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings" > "E-mail Control" > "Split Send Method", "Maximum Data Size per E-mail", "Maximum Total Job Size", and "Maximum Split Count" in the Administrator Guide.Note • [Split Send] is available only when the [File Format] is set to [PDF - Images Multiple Pages

per File], [DocuWorks], [mTIFF - Multiple Pages per File], or [XPS].

1 Select [Split Send].

2 Select any item.

Split by PageThe data is split at page breaks.

Split by Data SizeThe data is split by a certain data size.Note • Select this option if your e-mail application supports message/partial.

5 Scan

236

Scan

5

File Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Sent)When using the [E-mail] or [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify a name for the document to be sent.

Auto SetThe file name is "img-xxx-yyy.zzz" (where xxx is the date and time, yyy is the page number, and zzz is the extension).The extension depends on the setting in [File Format].

When [Multi-page TIFF] or [TIFF] is set for [File Format]: tif

When [PDF] is set for [File Format]: pdf

When [XPS] is set for [File Format]: xps

When [DocuWorks] is set for [File Format]: xdw

To set the file name

1 Select [File Name].

2 Enter a name of up to 128 characters using the displayed keyboard.

For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).Note • When each page is saved as one file, the page number is added to the end of each file

name.

Reply To (Specifying a Reply Address)When using the [E-mail] feature, you can specify the address for reply.

1 Select [Reply To].

2 Enter an address for reply.

[Reply To] boxTouching the [Reply To] box displays the keyboard screen allowing you to enter a reply address.

ClearDeletes the address entered in [Reply To].

Reply To MeUses the address specified in [From] as a reply address.Note • This button is enabled only when an address is set for [From] on the [E-mail] screen.

Address BookAllows you to select a reply address from the Address Book.Refer to "Address Book (Specifying an E-mail Address)" (P.201).


237

Scan

5

Note • When using a job template, the template name becomes a file name, which cannot be changed.

File Name Conflict (Setting the Action to be Taken for File Name Conflict)When using the [Scan to PC] feature, you can set the action to be taken when the file name conflicts with another file stored in the destination.

1 Select [File Name Conflict].

2 Select any item.

Do Not SaveThe job is cancelled and the file is not saved.

Rename New FileThe file name is automatically changed and saved. The machine adds a number (0001 - 9999) to the end of the file name.

Overwrite Existing FileThe existing file is replaced with the new one.

Document Name (Specifying a Name for the File to be Saved)When using the [Scan to Mailbox] feature, you can specify a name for the document to be saved.

Auto SetThe file name is "img-xxx" (where xxx is the date and time).

To set the file name

1 Select [Document Name].

2 Enter a name of up to 28 characters using the displayed keyboard.


Encryption (Sending E-mail Encrypted by S/MIME)When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send e-mail encrypted by S/MIME.When sending encrypted e-mail, select an e-mail address associated with a valid certificate from Address Book.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

OffSends e-mail without encryption.

5 Scan

238

Scan

5

OnSends e-mail with encryption.

Digital Signature (Sending E-mail with a Digital Signature by S/MIME)When using the [E-mail] feature, you can send e-mail with a digital signature by S/MIME.Digital Signature allows a recipient to confirm whether contents of the e-mail are changed, or whether the e-mail is sent from the proper sender.To use this feature, the machine's mail address must be linked to a certificate.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.For information on how to link a certificate to the e-mail address, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" > "S/MIME Certificate" in the Administrator Guide.

OffSends e-mail without a digital signature.

OnSends e-mail with a digital signature.

Login NameUse this feature to enter the login name for a destination server.Note • This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]

screen.

1 Select [Login Name].

2 Enter the login name using the keyboard displayed on the screen.


PasswordUse this feature to enter the password for a destination server.Note • This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]

screen.

1 Select [Password].

2 Enter the password using the keyboard displayed on the screen.


Meta DataUse this feature to change the values of the Document Management Field (DMF) if they are specified for a selected job template.Note • This feature is displayed only when [Network Scanning] is selected on the [All Services]

screen.

6 Send from Mailbox

This chapter describes the basic mailbox operation and mailbox features.Mailbox Operating Procedure ...................................................................240

Selecting a Mailbox...................................................................................242

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox...........................................243

Checking Document Details .....................................................................245

Printing Documents in a Mailbox ..............................................................246

Configuring/Starting Job Flow...................................................................249

6 Send from Mailbox

240

Send from M

ailbox

6

Mailbox Operating Procedure

The following shows the reference section for each procedure.Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] Screen .....................................................................240Step 2 Selecting a Mailbox .......................................................................................................240Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents ......................................................................241Step 4 Operating Mailbox Documents......................................................................................241

Step 1 Opening the [Send from Mailbox] ScreenFollow the procedure below to open the [Send from Mailbox] screen.Note • Features displayed depend on the machine configuration.


2 Select [Send from Mailbox].

Step 2 Selecting a MailboxSelectable mailboxes depend on the settings on the user authentication feature.For information on selectable mailboxes, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select a mailbox.

For information on the [Send from Mailbox] screen, refer to "Selecting a Mailbox" (P.242).

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C


Mailbox Operating Procedure

241

Send from M

ailbox

6

Step 3 Checking/Selecting Mailbox Documents

1 Select a document.

For information on the [Document List] screen, refer to "Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox" (P.243).

Step 4 Operating Mailbox DocumentsThe following shows the reference sections for operations available on the [Send from Mailbox] screen.

Checking Document Details..................................................................................................... 245Printing Documents in a Mailbox ............................................................................................ 246Configuring/Starting Job Flow................................................................................................. 249

6 Send from Mailbox

242

Send from M

ailbox

6

Selecting a Mailbox

The following describes the procedure to select a mailbox.Selectable mailboxes depend on the settings on the user authentication feature.For information on selectable mailboxes, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select a mailbox on the [Send from Mailbox] screen.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen and select [ ] to move to the next screen.

• An arrow is displayed next to each mailbox which has a link to a job flow sheet and for which the auto start is set.

• If you are prompted for a passcode, enter a passcode and select [Enter].

Go toDisplays a mailbox at the top when you enter the three-digit mailbox number with the numeric keypad.

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox

243

Send from M

ailbox

6

Checking/Operating Documents in a Mailbox

You can confirm or operate documents stored in a mailbox.

1 On the [Send from Mailbox] screen, select a mailbox.

2 Select a document.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• You can sort documents in ascending or

descending order by selecting either [Document Name] or [Stored Date].

• At the left of each document name, an icon is displayed to show the document type.

: Scanned document: Print document: Document for Store for Polling (Private Mailbox): Fax document: Internet Fax document

• Up to 100 documents can be selected separately. You can also select all documents. If you select documents separately, a number appears to the left of the document icon indicating the order in which it was selected. Documents are processed in this order.

3 Select any item.

RefreshDisplays the refreshed information.

ListLists the documents stored in the mailbox, with their stored dates and pages.

ThumbnailDisplays the images and names of the documents stored in the mailboxImportant • If power supply is cut off immediately after a scanned document is stored in a mailbox, or if

the hard disk space is insufficient to display thumbnails, documents in the mailbox may not be displayed in thumbnail view. In that case, display them in list view.

• The thumbnail view may not available for long documents. If a long document is not displayed in thumbnail view, display it in list view.

• Characters and images in thumbnail view may not be correctly displayed because they are scaled down from the actual sizes.

Note • The orientation of an image displayed in thumbnail view depends on which orientation the document was stored in.

• This feature may not be displayed depending on the machine configuration. Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

6 Send from Mailbox

244

Send from M

ailbox

6

Documents StoredDisplays the number of documents stored in the selected mailbox.

Select AllSelects all the documents in the mailbox.

DeleteDeletes the selected documents in the mailbox.

Document DetailsPreviews the selected document to allow you to check its details.For more information, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.245).Note • Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact

our Customer Support Center.

Job Flow SettingsDisplays the [Job Flow Settings] screen. This screen allows you to create, link, and execute job flows.Refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.249).Note • Job flows are not available for print documents. If print documents are included in the

selected documents, a job flow can be executed for the documents other than the print documents.

PrintAllows you to print the selected documents.Refer to "Print" (P.246).

Batch PrintAllows you to print the selected multiple documents as one document.Refer to "Batch Print" (P.247).

Checking Document Details

245

Send from M

ailbox

6

Checking Document Details

You can preview a document to check its details.Note • Monochrome images with high gradation levels may appear bluish when previewed.

• When the Image Log Control feature is used, it may take more time than expected to preview a document.

• Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

1 Select a document on the [Mailbox - Document List] screen.

2 Click [Document Details].

3 Select any item.

View SizeSelect whether to display the whole page or to enlarge the image by 200%.Note • A small document may not be enlarged even if you select [Enlarged View].

RotationSelect an angle to preview the image from [Right 90 degrees], [Left 90 degrees], and [180 degrees].

Change Document NameAllows you to change the document name. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new name.

Current PageSpecify a page to preview on the screen.

6 Send from Mailbox

246

Send from M

ailbox

6

Printing Documents in a Mailbox

You can print selected documents in a mailbox.

1 On the [Document List] screen, select documents.

2 Select [Print] or [Batch Print].Enter the number of print sets using the numeric keypad, if necessary.Note • When multiple documents are selected,

[Batch Print] treats the selected documents as one single document, while [Print] deals them as separate documents.

3 Select any item.

4 Click [Print].Note • When a document stored by [Save to Mailbox] of a print driver is printed, the settings

specified on the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services will override the settings specified on the print driver except the [Multiple-Up], [Skip Blank Page], and print position settings.

PrintConfigure the Print settings.

Paper SupplyAllows you to select paper.

2 Sided PrintingAllows you to set 2-sided printing.

OutputAllows you to set stapling, punching, and a tray where the output is delivered.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.For examples of the settings of stapling and hole punching, refer to "When stapling/punching holes" (P.247).

Document DetailsDisplays the [Document Details] screen. Select a document from the list to check its preview image.For details on previewing a document, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.245).Note • Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact


Printing Documents in a Mailbox

247

Send from M

ailbox

6


Batch PrintAllows you to set batch printing.You can print multiple documents as one document. Up to 100 documents can be bound in selected order. Note • For 2-sided printing, the last page becomes blank when the total number of printed pages is

odd. For printing of multiple documents, a blank page is inserted after the final page of each document.

• If a different size document is included in multiple documents, it may be printed in improper orientation.

• [Batch Print] is not available while interrupting another job.• [Batch Print] is not available for documents received by fax or Internet Fax, or documents for

Store for Polling (Private Mailbox). When the selected documents contain fax or Internet Fax documents, the machine will not print the fax or Internet Fax documents but only the scanned and print documents.

Paper SupplyAllows you to select paper.

2 Sided PrintingAllows you to set 2-sided printing.

OutputAllows you to set stapling and punching, and a tray where the output is delivered.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.For examples of the settings of stapling and hole punching, refer to "When stapling/punching holes" (P.247).

Document DetailsDisplays the [Document Details] screen. Select a document from the list to check its preview image.For details on previewing a document, refer to "Checking Document Details" (P.245).Note • Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact



When stapling/punching holesThe following table shows the stapled/punched positions with the example of [1 Staple] for stapling and [2 Holes] for punching for documents stored in a mailbox by specifying [Save to Mailbox] on a print driver and for scanned documents.

6 Send from Mailbox

248

Send from M

ailbox

6

For documents in a mailbox stored by specifying [Save to Mailbox] on a print driver

For scanned documents stored in a mailboxImportant • Ensure that the orientation of the document, and the [Original Orientation] setting of [Edge

Erase] or the [2 Sided Scanning] setting of [Layout Adjustment] tab, are the same.

Original

Stapling Position

Punching Position

Original

Original Orientation

Stapling Position

Punching Position

Report

Rep

ort

Report

Rep

ort

Report

Rep

ort

Report Report Report Report

Report

Report

ReportReport

Report Report

Report

Report

Report Report

Report

Report

Configuring/Starting Job Flow

249

Send from M

ailbox

6


Job flow is a feature that allows you to register transfer settings of scan data or documents received by fax, such as a transfer method and destination, to simplify data-transfer tasks.A job flow operates on documents stored in a mailbox, and starts in either of the following ways: 1) manually or automatically start a job flow when a document is stored in a mailbox, or 2) select a job flow to act on documents stored in a mailbox manually.To automatically start a job flow, you must make a link with a mailbox and a job flow sheet in advance. Documents are automatically processed with the job flow sheet when they are stored in the linked mailbox.Important • If the Authentication feature is not used, a job flow created in [Send from Mailbox] can only

be used/edited/duplicated/deleted through the mailbox where the job flow is created. This type of job flow is not displayed on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen. When using the Authentication feature, job flows whose owners are authenticated are displayed on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.

For information on job flows for the scanned documents, refer to "Job Status" (P.287).

Features that can be registered are listed below.

ForwardMultiple forwarding recipients can be configured for each forwarding method.

FTP (ApeosPort series only)Forwards via FTP. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.

SMB (ApeosPort series only)Forwards via SMB. Up to 2 recipients can be specified.

Mail (ApeosPort series only)Forwards via E-mail. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.

FaxForwards via fax. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.

Internet FaxForwards via Internet Fax. Up to 100 recipients can be specified.

PrintDocuments in a mailbox can be printed.Some features are unavailable depending on the store type of the document.When your machine is the DocuCentre series

OutputInput Print Fax

Internet Fax*1 Mail FTP SMB

Store for Polling(Private Mailbox) O O O X X X

Scanning O O O X X X

Fax document O*2 O O X X X

Internet Faxdocument O O X X X

Print Stored X X X X X X

6 Send from Mailbox

250

Send from M

ailbox

6

When your machine is the ApeosPort series

O: AvailableX: Not available

: Available depending on the settings in the System Administration mode.*1 When the profile is set to TIFF-S for the Internet Fax Transfer, always load A4 documents in landscape orientation.

If you load the documents in portrait orientation, Internet Fax images will be reduced in size.*2 Even if you set to delete documents from a mailbox after a print job is completed, if the USB cable for Fax is pulled

out while a document is being printed.

Note • When you forward a monochrome (2-color) document via Mail, FTP or SMB while the Input is set to Document for Store for Polling (Private Mailbox) or Fax document, the recipient will not be able to open the file if [Output Format] of Job Flow is set to [JPEG].

1 On the [Document List] screen, select documents.

2 Select [Job Flow Settings].

3 Select any item.

Auto StartThis sets auto start of the job flow for documents stored in the mailbox. The job flow automatically starts when a document is stored.

Start Current Job FlowSelect documents from the mailbox and select this button to start the job flow linked to this mailbox.Important • After executing the job flow, print the job history report to check the result. For information on

the job history report, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Job History Report" in the Administrator Guide.

Cut LinkCancels the link between a mailbox and the linked job flow sheet.

OutputInput Print Fax

InternetFax*1 Mail FTP SMB

Store for Polling(Private Mailbox) O O O O O O

Scanning O O O O O O

Fax document O*2 O O O O O

Internet Faxdocument O O O O

Print Stored X X X X X X


251

Send from M

ailbox

6

Create/Change LinkDisplays the [Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] screen.Refer to "[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] Screen" (P.251).

Select Job Flow SheetWhen selecting this button while documents are selected, the [Select Job Flow Sheet] screen is displayed.Refer to "[Select Job Flow Sheet] Screen" (P.252).

[Link Job Flow Sheet to Mailbox] ScreenYou can change the link between the mailbox and its job flow sheet.Note • Linking, delinking, and auto start settings can be also performed during the creation of a

mailbox.

1 Select a job flow sheet to link to.Important • Selecting [Save] without selecting a job

flow sheet does not set a link. If the selected job flow sheet is already linked, then the link is cancelled.


• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by touching either [Name] or [Updated].

• At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed.

:Mailbox Document2 Select any item.

RefreshRefreshes the information.

CreateDisplays the [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen.Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Create New Job Flow Sheet" in the Administrator Guide.

Edit/DeleteDisplays the [Details] screen.Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Edit/Delete" in the Administrator Guide.

Search by NameSearches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 128 characters long.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).

Search by KeywordSearches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12 characters long.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).

6 Send from Mailbox

252

Send from M

ailbox

6

Select KeywordDisplays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.

Sheet FilteringDisplays the [Sheet Filtering] screen allowing you to filter the job flow sheets displayed.For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.252).

[Sheet Filtering] ScreenFilters the job flow sheets displayed.Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. Refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select the filtering conditions, then select [Save].Note • The job flows that can be displayed on

[Send from Mailbox] are those whose [Target] is [Mailbox], and those stored on the machine.

OwnerAllows you to select an owner.

TargetAllows you to select the target of the job flow sheet.

[Select Job Flow Sheet] ScreenYou can select and modify job flow sheets associated with the mailbox.

1 Select a job flow, and press the <Start> button.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• You can sort the list in ascending or

descending order by pressing either [Name] or [Updated].

• At the left of the name, an icon showing the target of the job flow is displayed.

:Mailbox Document

StartExecutes the selected job flow sheet.

DetailsDisplays the [Details] screen.Refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Create Job Flow Sheet" > "Edit/Delete" in the Administrator Guide.

Change SettingsIf the selected job flow sheet setting is editable, the [Change Settings] screen appears. You can temporarily change the settings.


253

Send from M

ailbox

6

Search by NameSearches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 128 characters long.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).

Search by KeywordSearches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12 characters long.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).

Select KeywordDisplays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.

Sheet FilteringDisplays the [Sheet Filtering] screen.For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.252).

Job Flow RestrictionsA job flow sheet can be used by only one user, can be shared by multiple users, or can be used for only certain mailboxes.Job flow restrictions may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" in the Administrator Guide.

7 Job Flow Sheets

This chapter describes the scanning operation using a job flow sheet created on a network computer and registered in the machine.Job Flow Sheets is a feature that allows you to register transfer settings of scan data, such as a transfer method and destination, to simplify data-transfer tasks.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Job Flow Procedure..................................................................................256

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet......................................................258

7 Job Flow Sheets

256

Job Flow Sheets

7

Job Flow Procedure

Job flow sheets are categorized into two types according to the target. One type of job flow sheets targets scanned documents, and the other type targets documents stored in mailboxes. This chapter describes the first type of job flow sheets, targeting scanned documents.For details on the job flow sheets that target documents stored in mailboxes, refer to "Configuring/Starting Job Flow" (P.249).

This section explains how to select a job flow sheet and execute the job flow. Refer to the following sections for detailed steps.To create and register a job flow sheet, use a personal computer.

Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] Screen ..........................................................................256Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet ............................................................................................257Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet.....................................................................257Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet ...........................................................................................257

For information on how to create and register job flow sheets, refer to the manual stored on the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.

Step 1 Opening the [Job Flow Sheets] ScreenFollow the procedure below to open the [Job Flow Sheets] screen.


2 Select [Job Flow Sheets].

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C


Job Flow Procedure

257

Job Flow Sheets

7

Step 2 Selecting a Job Flow Sheet

1 Select a job flow sheet.

For more information on the [Job Flow Sheets] screen, refer to "Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet" (P.258).

Step 3 Confirming/Changing the Job Flow Sheet

1 To see the details, select [Details]. To change the settings, select [Change Settings].For information on checking/changing job flow settings, refer to "Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet" (P.258).

Step 4 Starting the Job Flow Sheet

1 Load the originals.Note • A job flow sheet with application linkage does not require loading documents.

2 Press the <Start> button.Important • After executing the job flow, be sure to print the job history report to check the result. For

information on the job history report, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Job History Report" in the Administrator Guide.

7 Job Flow Sheets

258

Job Flow Sheets

7

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet

To use a job flow sheet whose target is scanned documents from a network computer with CentreWare EasyOperator, select the job flow sheet from this list.Important • If characters not supported by the machine are used in the name or description of a job flow

sheet, the characters will not be displayed or will be garbled on the screen. For information on characters that can be used in the names or descriptions of job flow sheets, refer to "15 Appendix" > "Notes and Restrictions" > "Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • To communicate with network computers, the SOAP port must be enabled on the machine.• A job flow sheet created on a network computer can be deleted, but cannot be changed or

duplicated. Note, however, change-permitted items can be used by making a temporary change to them.

For information on how to enable the port, refer to "5 Tools" > "Connectivity & Network Setup" > "Port Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select a job flow sheet.Note • Displayed job flow sheets may vary

depending on the user authentication feature.For more information, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" > "Overview" > "Job Flow Sheet Types and Overview" in the Administrator Guide.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

• You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting either [Name] or [Last Updated].

RefreshDisplays refreshed information.

DetailsThe [Details] screen appears. Allows you to confirm the details of a job flow such as the name, last update and save location. When you select [Details...], the whole text of the description which was registered when creating the job flow sheet is displayed.

Change SettingsDisplays the [Change Settings] screen. Allows you to change the job flow settings.Refer to "[Change Settings] Screen" (P.259).

Search by NameSearches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow names that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 128 characters long.

Search by KeywordSearches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation. The entry can be up to 12 characters long.

Selecting/Changing a Job Flow Sheet

259

Job Flow Sheets

7

Select KeywordDisplays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the system settings to search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.

Sheet FilteringDisplays the [Sheet Filtering] screen allowing you to filter the job flow sheets displayed.For more information, refer to "[Sheet Filtering] Screen" (P.260).

[Change Settings] Screen

1 Select a group to be changed from [Group of Items].

2 Select the item to be changed.Note • A triangle icon appears at the left of each

mandatory item.

3 Select any item.

ItemsThe items set for the job flow sheet.

Current SettingsThe values set for the job flow sheet.

Previous GroupDisplays the items of the previous group.

Next GroupDisplays the items of the next group.

Add E-mail RecipientAdds recipients for the e-mail.

7 Job Flow Sheets

260

Job Flow Sheets

7

[Sheet Filtering] ScreenFilters the job flow sheets displayed. Job flow sheets displayed on the screen depend on the settings of the Authentication feature.Displayed job flow sheets may vary depending on the user authentication feature. For more information, refer to "13 Authentication and Account Administration" > "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Mailboxes" > "Overview" > "Job Flow Sheet Types and Overview" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select the filtering conditions, then select [Save].

OwnerSelect an owner of job flow sheets displayed on the screen.

TargetSelect a target for the job flow sheet.Note • Job flow sheets whose [Job Flow Target] is [Mailbox] can be used only from Send from

Mailbox.

8 Stored Programming

This chapter describes the Stored Programming feature that enables you to store customized job settings.

Stored Programming Overview.................................................................262

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................263

Calling a Stored Program .........................................................................268


262

Stored Programm

ing

8

Stored Programming Overview

This feature allows you to store settings that you expect to use frequently and call them with a single button operation. You can also assign a screen to a stored program button, to use the button as a short-cut to the screen.A stored program can store not only settings of a feature, but a flow of settings configured on multiple screens.For example, this feature is available when you want to record a procedure starting from pressing the <Machine Status> button, to displaying the [Report Job] screen to print a job history report.In addition, while Build Job is running, this feature can be used for the remaining document stacks.For information on Build Job, refer to "Build Job (Processing Documents Scanned with Different Settings as One Job)" (P.115).

The following shows the reference section for each feature.Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs....................................................................263Calling a Stored Program..........................................................................................................268

Registering/Deleting/Renaming Stored Programs

263

Stored Programm

ing

8


The [Stored Programming] screen allows you to register and delete stored programs.Important • When registering a stored program to select paper size or type loaded on the bypass tray,

register both the paper size and the paper type. If only the paper size or type is registered, the stored program may not be called properly.

• If any of the following operations is performed while a stored program is being registered, the stored program may not be registered or may not work correctly.- Removing or inserting a paper tray- Loading or reloading paper on the bypass tray

• If any of the following operations is performed after a stored program registration, the registered stored program may not be called properly.- If the stored program has the Watermark feature and the Watermark value is changed. - If any registered feature becomes disabled due to its value change under System Settings.- If the stored program has an operation for a mailbox and the mailbox passcode is changed.

Note • Any services that are set using the following cannot be registered: System Settings, [Browse...] under Scan to PC, Job Flow Sheets, Network Scanning, Address Book, and other stored programs.

• A stored program registration is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (such as a paper jam window) appears.


2 Select [Setup].

3 Select [Stored Programming].

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C



264

Stored Programm

ing

8

4 Select the feature.

StoreRegister a stored program.Refer to "Registering Stored Programs" (P.264).

Store Build JobRegister a stored program for Build Job.Refer to "Registering Stored Programs for Build Job" (P.265).

DeleteDeletes a stored program.Refer to "Deleting Stored Programs" (P.266).

Enter/Change NameEnter or change a stored program name.Refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.266).

Assign/Change IconConfigure an icon for a registered stored program.Refer to "Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored Programs" (P.267).

Registering Stored ProgramsUp to 100 actions can be registered with one stored program. Up to 40 stored programs can be registered in the machine.Actions registered in stored programs No.1 to 20 can also be performed by using one touch buttons <M01> to <M20>. (This feature is available only when the optional Fax service is installed).The following is the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.Important • If registered settings such as tray paper size and comments, or default values in the system

settings are changed after a stored program is registered, then the program's content also changes.

Note • Services using System Settings, Job Flow Sheet, Network Scanning, or Address Book cannot be registered.

• The registering procedure for a stored program is cancelled when the <Interrupt> button is pressed, the Auto Clear feature causes a time-out, or a popup window (paper jam, etc.) appears.


265

Stored Programm

ing

8

1 Select [Store].

2 Select the number to register.Note • Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot

be overwritten.• Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.3 Set the feature you want to register.

Note • The machine produces an audible tone while a stored program is registered.

• Press the <Interrupt> button to cancel registration.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Stored Programming Tone" in the Administrator Guide.

4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.Note • If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes "No Name".For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.266).

Registering Stored Programs for Build JobUp to 100 actions can be registered with one stored program for Build Job. Up to 40 stored programs can be registered in the machine.The following is the procedure for registering actions with stored programs.

1 Select [Store Build Job].

2 Select a number to register a stored program.Note • Once a job is stored to a button, it cannot

be overwritten.• Select [ ] to return to the previous


3 Set the feature you want to register.Note • The machine produces an audible tone

while a stored program is registered.• Press the <Interrupt> button to cancel registration.

You can change the volume of the sound that notifies of stored program registration. For information on the settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Audio Tones" > "Stored Programming Tone" in the Administrator Guide.

4 Press the <Start> button or <Clear All> button.Note • At the left of a stored program for Build Job on the list, the icon is displayed.

• If no name is entered for a registered stored program, the name becomes “No Name”.For information on how to name a registered stored program, refer to "Entering/Changing a Stored Program Name" (P.266).


266

Stored Programm

ing

8

Deleting Stored ProgramsThe following is the procedure for deleting stored programs.

1 Select [Delete].

2 Select the number to delete.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous


3 Select [Delete].

DeleteDeletes the stored program.Note • Deleted stored programs cannot be

restored.

CancelCancels deleting the stored program.

Entering/Changing a Stored Program NameThe following is the procedure for entering or changing the name of a stored program.Up to 36 characters are allowed for a stored program's name.For information on how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.51).

1 Select [Enter/Change Name].

2 Select the number to register or change a name.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous


3 Enter a name, and select [Save].


267

Stored Programm

ing

8

Assigning/Changing Icons for Stored ProgramsThe following is the procedure for assigning or changing an icon of a stored program.12 icons are available.

1 Select [Assign/Change Icon].

2 Select the number to assign or change an icon.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous


3 Select an icon, and select [Save].

No IconNo icon is assigned to a registered stored program.

IconSelect an icon according to the content of the registered stored program.


268

Stored Programm

ing

8

Calling a Stored Program

This describes the procedure for calling a stored program.When calling a specified stored program, the last screen shown when you registered the stored programming appears.



3 Select the number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.Note • You can only select registered numbers.

• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

4 After the stored program is called, select other features if necessary.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Start> button

Calling a Stored Program

269

Stored Programm

ing

8

Calling a Stored Program for Build JobYou can call a stored program for Build Job on the [Copy] screen displayed while Build Job is running.

1 Select [Change Settings...].

2 Select the [Job Assembly] tab.


4 Select a number of a stored program containing the features you want to use.Note • You can only select registered numbers.

9 Web Applications

This chapter describes the operations when the Remote Access Kit (optional) is installed.Note • This feature is supported only by the ApeosPort series.

Web Applications ......................................................................................272

Accessing Web Applications.....................................................................273

Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the All Services Screen ............274

9 Web Applications

272

Web A

pplications

9

Web Applications

You can access web applications to store scanned document in folders or print stored files.The machine offers the following features:

Allows you to access web applications from the machine, and displays the web application screen on the machine

Allows you to store the scanned document directly in a web application folder

Allows you to print a file that is stored on a server directlyNote • The web applications that can be displayed on the machine are those which are compatible

with the machine. You cannot access website on the Internet.To access the web application on the machine, you need to configure the settings in advance. For information on web application settings, refer to "5 Tools" > "Web Applications Service Setup" in the Administrator Guide.

Accessing Web Applications

273

Web A

pplications

9

Accessing Web Applications

To access web applications, follow the procedure below.An access destination must be registered in advance. For information on how to register an access destination, refer to "5 Tools" > "Web Applications Service Setup" > "Server Setup" in the Administrator Guide.


2 Select [Web Applications].Note • If Auto Jump Destination has been set,

the machine can access the remote service.

3 Select an access destination.

4 Select [Open] on the pop-up menu displayed.

OpenAccesses the specified remote service.

DetailsDisplays the information of the specified remote service.


1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C


9 Web Applications

274

Web A

pplications

9

Accessing Using Buttons Registered on the All Services Screen

The following describes how to register frequently used web applications on the All Services screen as buttons, and access the applications by simply selecting the buttons.For information on how to register buttons on the All Services screen, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Screen/Button Settings" > "All Services" in the Administrator Guide.


2 Select [Head Office] registered on the [All Services] screen.Note • In this example, an access destination

named [Head Office] is registered in the position of Job Flow Sheets. You can place the button anywhere on the screen.

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C


10 Media Print (Text and Photos)

This chapter describes the basic procedures and features of Media Print - Text and Media Print - Photos when the Media Print Kit (optional) is installed.

Overview of Media Print............................................................................276

Components and their Functions..............................................................279

Inserting and Ejecting Media ....................................................................280

Selecting Files ..........................................................................................281

Setting the Printing Options ......................................................................283


276

Media Print (Text and Photos)

10

Overview of Media Print

When the Media Print Kit (optional) is installed on the machine, the machine can directly import and print image data (Exif) taken with a digital camera and document files (PDF, TIFF, XPS). This feature is called the Media Print feature.If a USB memory is connected to the machine, the data stored in the USB memory can also be printed.Important • Data stored in media, such as SmartMedia or CompactFlash, may be lost or damaged for

the following reasons. Make sure to back up data in media before use.- When ejecting media, switching the power off/on, disconnecting/connecting USB cables by

methods other than described in this guide.- When receiving the effect of electrical noise or an electrical discharge- When a failure occurs or repairing- When receiving damage resulting from a natural calamity

• We assume no responsibility for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.

Note • "Exif" is a file format that embeds information required to print the image data taken with a digital camera.

The Media Print feature includes the Media Print - Photos mode that prints data stored with the standard digital camera format, as well as the Media Print - Text mode that prints data stored with the text format. It also includes index printing that prints a list of files imported with the Media Print - Photos mode and the Media Print - Text mode.

Supported Media and File FormatsThe machine supports only CompactFlash. To use media other than CompactFlash, insert the media into a CompactFlash adapter.Note • You must purchase the media and a CompactFlash adapter separately.

The following media and file formats can be used.

Important • MagicGate Memory Stick cannot be used.• Do not store image files and document files in a single medium.• If the medium contains more than 900 folders, you may not be able to confirm them

correctly.• In the Media Print -Text mode, PDF files or TIFF files cannot be printed if they are stored in

folders.• PDF files saved on Mac OS cannot be displayed and printed on the screen.• If a file name contains characters that are not supported by the machine, the file name will

not be displayed on the screen.

Supported MediaSupported File Format

Media Print - Photos Media Print - Text

Smart MediaCompactFlashCompactFlash(MicroDrive)SD CardMemory StickxD-Picture Card

JPEG filesTIFF filesSupports DCF1.0 (Exif2.0, Exif2.1, Exif2.2) JPEG/TIFF files

PDF filesExtension: pdf, PDF 1.3 or laterTIFF filesExtension: tif, Grayscale 4 bit/8bit uncompressed, 8bit/24 bit JPEG compressed, MH/MMR compressedXPS filesExtension: xps

Overview of Media Print

277


10

Note • In the Media Print - Photos mode, up to 8 characters can be recognized as a file name. In the Media Print - Text mode, up to 255 characters can be recognized. If the name exceeds 100 characters, the data is displayed excluding the file name.

• Up to 900 files can be processed with the Media Print feature.• Use media formatted with digital cameras or computers (FAT 12, 16, 32 only).

Notes and RestrictionsThe following notes and restrictions apply on use of the Media Print feature.

Use the Media Print feature with the medium inserted into the Memory Card Reader. Otherwise, an error code (016-794/116-212) is displayed.

Image files other than files in Exif format (JPEG/TIFF files created on computers) cannot be printed.

Take note that once an image in Exif format is edited or saved on a computer, the Exif format is erased.

If the media fails, the process is terminated within a few minutes, and an error message is displayed.

Be sure to eject the media before switching off the machine.

Be sure to wait until printing completes and then eject the media by following the procedure described in this guide.

Be sure to back up data in media before use.

Printing data may take from a few minutes to several tens of minutes, depending on the volume or quantity of files on the media.

Depending on the type of adaptor, the Memory Card Reader may not be able to read the data. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

To store image data on a media card, use image data formatted with a digital camera. To store document files on a media card, use document files formatted with a computer.- In the Media Print - Photos mode, files are printed only from the DCF directory

located directly under the DCIM directory. Only a file name or folder name with 8characters in DCF format can be recognized.

- In the Media Print - Text mode, files are printed only from the directory locateddirectly under. A file name or folder name can be recognized even if exceeding 8characters.

When printing a PDF file using Media Print, [PDF Bridge] is selected regardless of the [Print Processing Mode] setting in [PDF Direct Print].For more information on Print Processing Mode, refer to "15 Appendix" > "PDF Direct Print" > "PDFDirect Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

When using the Memory Card Reader, be sure to connect the USB cable of the Memory Card Reader to the machine before switching the machine on.

When the <Access> indicator of the Memory Card Reader is lit, do not press the <CompactFlash Eject> button, disconnect the USB cable, or switch the machine off. The data in the media may become damaged.

Do not connect multiple USB memories to the machine simultaneously.

The machine does not support all types of USB memory. (Example: USB memory with the encryption feature or with multiple partitions is not supported.)


278


10

The left USB port on the back of the machine does not recognize USB 1.1 devices. If you insert USB 1.1 compliant media into the left USB port, the port will not recognize USB 2.0 compliant media thereafter.

When changing from the Memory Card Reader to USB memory, be sure to switch the machine off and then on again.

Do not use media if it stores data that cannot be backed up, such as music data with the copyright protection function. We assume no responsibility for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data loss.

Components and their Functions

279


10

Components and their Functions


1 <Access> indicator Lights when the medium is accessed.

2 <CompactFlash Eject> button

Press this button to eject a CompactFlash card. The button pops up when a CompactFlash card is inserted.

3 CompactFlash slot Insert a CompactFlash card here.


280


10

Inserting and Ejecting Media

This section describes how to insert and eject media.

Inserting Media

1 Insert a CompactFlash card into the CompactFlash slot of the Memory Card Reader, with the side with the insertion mark, such as , facing up.

The <CompactFlash Eject> button pops up when a CompactFlash card is inserted correctly.To print, refer to "Selecting Files" (P.281), and "Setting the Printing Options" (P.283)".After printing, refer to "Ejecting Media" (P.280), and eject the media.

Ejecting MediaBefore ejecting media, make sure that the <Access> indicator of the Memory Card Reader is not lit.Important • When the <Access> indicator of the Memory Card Reader is lit, do not press the

<CompactFlash Eject> button, disconnect the USB cable, or switch the machine off. The data in the media may become damaged.

1 Press the <CompactFlash Eject> button (1), and then remove the CompactFlash card (2).

Selecting Files

281


10

Selecting Files

You can select files using any of the following three methods.Selecting all files.

Selecting the desired files from the [Select From List] screen. You can select up to 100 files in the Media Print - Photos mode, or up to 32 files in the Media Print - Text mode, simultaneously.

Selecting with index numbers (one or a range)


2 Select [Media Print - Text] or [Media Print - Photos].Media importing starts.While the files are being imported, the <Access> indicator lights.After the files are imported, the <Access> indicator goes off.

Note • The file is imported in the mode selected here.

• Index numbers from 001 to 900 automatically are assigned to the files imported.

3 After the files are imported, select files with either [Select Pictures] or [Select Documents].Note • The screen on the right is an example

when [Media Print - Photos] is selected.

4 After selecting files to be printed, set the printing options.For more information on the printing options, refer to "Setting the Printing Options" (P.283).Note • On the pop-up menu displayed when selecting files, you can cancel the selection or display

details.• Select [ ] to return to the previous screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.

Select AllSelects all image data or document files to be printed.Note • Depending on the types of files stored on the media or the directory configuration, not all of

the files selected may be printed.

Select From ListDisplays the [Select From List] screen.Refer to "[Select From List] Screen" (P.282).

Select RangeSpecify the range to be printed using [ ] and [ ] in [First picture] and [Last picture].Note • Select [Select From List] to display a list of files, and reference the list when selecting the

range.


282


10

Index PrintApplies the numbers automatically assigned to the selected files, and prints them in a list.For more information on Index Print, refer to "Index Print" (P.285).

[Select From List] ScreenYou can select the desired files from a list of files.Note • The screen on the right is an example

when [Media Print - Photos] is selected• Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• A check mark is inserted in the check box

next to each file selected. Touch a file selected (highlighted) to deselect it.

ListDisplays the file names, and the date and time that the files were registered.Note • You can sort the list in ascending or descending order by selecting either [(No.) ], [Name],

or [Date & Time].

ThumbnailDisplays a list of the images and names of the files.Note • The thumbnail view may not be available for some files. If a file is not displayed in thumbnail

view, display it in List view or in Index Print.• Characters and images may not be correctly displayed in thumbnail view because they are

reduced in size.

Important • An image is displayed in thumbnail view in the orientation with which the document was stored.

• This feature may not be displayed depending on the machine configuration. Some models require an optional package to use this feature. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

DetailsDisplays detailed information on the file selected (highlighted). To print the file, select [Print] on the [Details] screen.

Deselect AllDeselects all selected files.

Select AllSelects all files.

Setting the Printing Options

283


10


You can set the printing options on the [Media Print Text] or [Media Print Photos], and [Advanced Settings] tabs.To display a list of the setting values, press the <Review> button on the control panel.

Media Print - Photos

Tab Item Setting Value

- Quantity Specify the print quantity within the range of 1 - 999, using the numeric keypad.

Media Print Photos Output Color [Color], [Black & White]

Paper Supply Trays 1 - 5 Note • Any of the following sizes of paper must be

loaded in the selected tray: [SRA3], [A3], [B4],[A4], [A4 ], [B5], [B5 ], [8.5 x 11"], [8.5 x11" ], [Post card]

• If the tray to be used is not displayed, select [More], and on the screen displayed, select the desired tray.

If you select [More] and then [Tray (Bypass)], [Paper Size] and [Paper Type] are selectable.

Paper Size[SRA3], [A3], [B4], [A4], [A4 ], [B5], [B5 ],[8.5 x 11"], [8.5 x 11" ], [Post card]Paper TypeSelect the paper type to be used from the listdisplayed.

2 Sided Printing [1 Sided], [2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge], [2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge]

Output Photo Size Full Page Print5 x 7"Select [More] and then select [Output Size] onthe screen displayed, and you can select thenext size.[3.5 x 5"], [5 x 7"], [100 x 148mm], [A4], [8.5 x 11"]

Note • According to the print paper size and the sizeselected here, only the photos fitting on onesheet of paper are aligned and printed. If youselect [1 Picture per Page], one sheet of paperis used for one file and printed.

3 Pictures per PageSelect [More] and then select [Pictures perPage] on the screen displayed, and you canselect the next quantity.[2 Pictures], [3 Pictures (Center)], [3 Pictures(Left)], [4 Pictures], [6 Pictures], [8 Pictures]

Advanced settings Bitmap Smoothing [Off], [On]


284


10

Note • When selecting a paper size smaller than the image size, the image automatically is reduced. When selecting a paper size larger than the image size, the image is printed at its original size.

Media Print - Text

Note • When selecting a paper size smaller than the size set for the document, the document automatically is reduced. When selecting a paper size larger than the document size, the document is printed at its original size.

Tab Item Setting Value

- Quantity Specify the print quantity within the range of 1 - 999, using the numeric keypad.

Media Print Text Output Color [Color], [Black & White]

Paper Supply Auto Paper Select, Trays 1 - 5 Note • Select [Auto] or a tray that holds any of the

followings sizes of paper: [A3], [B4], [A4],[A4 ], [B5], [B5 ], [A5], [A5 ], [8.5 x 11"],[8.5 x 11" ], [8.5 x 14"], [11 x 17"]

• When selecting [Auto], a paper tray of the size of the document is selected automatically, and the document is printed at its original size.

• When the tray to be used is not displayed, select [More], and select the tray on the screen displayed.

If you select [More] and then [Tray (Bypass)], [Paper Size] and [Paper Type] are selectable.

Paper Size[A3], [B4], [A4], [A4 ], [B5], [B5 ], [A5], [A5 ],[8.5 x 11"], [8.5 x 11" ], [8 x 14"], [11 x 17"]Paper TypeSelect the paper type to be used from the list.

2 Sided Printing [1 Sided], [2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge], [2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge]

Output Specify the stapled/punched positions.To specify a position not displayed on the screen, select [Details].Important • If you select and print multiple documents,

all of the documents are stapled together. To staple only one document, print only that document.

Advanced settings Multiple-Up [Off], [2 Pages Up], [4 Pages Up]

Bitmap Smoothing [Off], [On]


285


10

Index Print

For the Media Print - Photos mode, a list of 30 x 40mm reduced images, plus the numbers, the file names, and the dates the images were exported to the media are printed.

For the Media Print - Text mode, the file names (maximum 2 lines and 100 characters), the dates the documents were exported to the media, and the total file quantity are printed.

For Index Print, only the print quantity (in one-set units within the range of 1 - 999 sets) can be set. Items other than the print quantity are printed with the settings displayed on the screen (Media Print Photos or Media Print Text settings prior to executing Index Print mode). To change the settings, deselect [Index Print], change the settings, and then execute Index Print. The setting values return to the default values if the machine is restarted.When selecting [Index Print], the following items are restricted.

Setting Item Value

Output Color For the Media Print - Text modeOnly [Black & White]

Paper Supply Trays 1 - 5 Note • Any of the following sizes of paper must be loaded in the

selected tray: [A3], [A4], [A4 ], [8.5 x 11"], or [8.5 x 11" ]

Output Photo Size Not available

Multiple-Up Not available

11 Job Status

This chapter describes the job status feature.Job Status Overview.................................................................................288

Checking Current/Pending Jobs ...............................................................289

Checking Completed Jobs........................................................................290

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents..................................................291

Printing Pending Jobs...............................................................................302

Handling Error Terminations.....................................................................303

11 Job Status

288

Job Status11

Job Status Overview

The job status feature allows you to check current, pending, and completed jobs. You can also cancel printing and print pending jobs.


You can do the following on the [Job Status] screen.

Checking Current/Pending JobsLists current and pending jobs, and displays their details. Also allows you to cancel current or pending jobs.For more information, refer to "Checking Current/Pending Jobs" (P.289).

Checking Completed JobsDisplays the status of completed jobs. Also displays their details.For more information, refer to "Checking Completed Jobs" (P.290).

Checking Stored DocumentsPrints or deletes documents stored using the Charge Print, Secure Print, Private Charge Print, Sample Set, and Delayed Print features.For more information, refer to "Printing and Deleting Stored Documents" (P.291).

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

0 #

C

<Job Status> button

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

289

Job Status

11

Checking Current/Pending Jobs

This section describes how to check current or pending jobs. On the status screen, you can cancel or preferentially execute jobs.


2 Select the job to be cancelled or preferentially executed.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• From the pull-down menu, you can select

and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).

3 Select [Cancel] or [Promote Job].

Print Waiting JobsSelect this to print the jobs that are waiting to be output.For more information, refer to "Printing Pending Jobs" (P.302).

CancelCancels the current or pending job.

Promote JobPreferentially executes the selected job.A [ ] will be marked on the [Status] of the job set to [Promote Job].

StopStops the job processing.

Last OriginalSelect this to end scanning of documents. The job is then executed.

Next OriginalSelect this when you have another document to scan.

StartResumes the stopped job.

11 Job Status

290

Job Status11

Checking Completed Jobs

This section describes how to check completed jobs.You can check whether a job has been completed successfully. Also, you can select a job to see the details.


2 Select the [Completed Jobs] tab.Note • Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• From the pull-down menu, you can select

and display the types of jobs ([All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Mailbox Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs], [Job Flow & Auto File Transfer Jobs]).

3 Select a job to see the details.

4 Select [Close] after the check.

Group Parent JobsAllows you to check the list or history of related jobs (such as job flow jobs).

Show Children JobsDisplays a job list.

Print this Job History ReportPrints the job results to allow you to check the job history.

Print this Job ReportPrints a job status information report.

Printing and Deleting Stored Documents

291

Job Status

11


This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Secure Print or Sample Set feature, or stored with the charge print receiving control. The [Job Status] screen allows you to print or delete stored documents.The following shows the reference section for each item.

Secure Print .............................................................................................................................. 291Sample Set................................................................................................................................ 293Delayed Print............................................................................................................................ 294Charge Print.............................................................................................................................. 296Private Charge Print ................................................................................................................. 298Public Mailbox ......................................................................................................................... 300Undelivered Faxes.................................................................................................................... 301


2 Select the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab.

The buttons displayed on the screen vary depending on the settings related to the Private Charge Print feature. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Secure PrintThis feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine to print it with the print command from the machine.This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Secure Print feature.For information on secure print operations, refer to the print driver's help.

Note • This feature is not displayed when [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings] is set to either of the followings:

• [According to Print Account] is selected, and [Job Login Success] is set to [Save in Private Print]

• [Save in Private Print] is selected.When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Secure Print] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Secure Print] on the print driver. For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Secure Print].

11 Job Status

292

Job Status11

2 Select the user to be checked, and select [Document List].Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated

information• Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• Entering a 3-digit billing ID with the

numeric keypad specifies the user directly.

3 Enter the passcode, and select [Confirm].Note • If no passcode is assigned, the passcode

entry screen will not appear.

4 Select the document to be printed or deleted.

5 When printing, specify the number of print using the numeric keypad.

6 Select any item.

Select AllSelects all documents. To deselect all the documents, select this button again.

DeleteDeletes the selected document.Note • If documents with the same Billing ID are all deleted, the Billing ID will be deleted.Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.292).

PrintPrints the selected document.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.293).

When [Delete] is Selected

1 Select [Delete].

DeleteDeletes the document.Important • Once the document is deleted, it cannot

be restored.

CancelCancels deleting the document.


293

Job Status

11

When [Print] is Selected

1 Select what to do with the document after printing.

Print and DeleteStarts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.

Print and SaveStarts printing the document. After printing, the document remains undeleted.

CancelCancels printing the document.

Sample SetBefore printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print one copy for trial, and then print the rest from the machine.This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Sample Set feature.For information on Sample Set operations, refer to the print driver's help.Note • When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for

[Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Sample Set] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Sample Set] on the print driver.

For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Sample Set].


information.• Select [ ] to return to the previous

screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• Entering a 3-digit user ID with the numeric

keypad specifies the user directly.



5 Select any item.


11 Job Status

294

Job Status11

DeleteDeletes the selected document.Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.294).

PrintPrints a Sample Set document. After printing the remaining sets of the document, the stored Sample Set document is deleted.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.294).


1 Select [Delete].


be restored.



1 Select [Yes].

YesStarts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.Note • If a time period specified in [Auto Job

Release] elapses with no operation carried out after printing the first print set, the machine automatically prints the second print set. If you do not want the second print set to be printed automatically, specify a longer time period in [Auto Job Release]. For how to set [Auto Job Release], refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Machine Clock/Timers" > "Auto Job Release" in the Administrator Guide.

NoCancels printing the document.

Delayed PrintThis feature allows you to temporarily store print data on the machine to print it at specified time.This section describes how to print or delete documents stored with the Delayed Print feature.For information on Delayed Print operations, refer to the print driver's help.


295

Job Status

11

Note • When you have selected [Save in Private Charge Print] or [Save in Charge Print] for [Receive Control] under [Charge/Private Print Settings], jobs will not be saved in [Delayed Print] under [Secure Print Jobs & More] even if you select [Delayed Print] on the print driver.For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

1 Select [Delayed Print].

2 Select the document to be printed or deleted.Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated


screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• [Print Time] shows the time to start

printing.


4 Select any item.


PrintPrints the selected document. After printing, deletes the document. If printed manually, the document will not be printed at the specified time.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.296).


1 Select [Delete].


be restored.


11 Job Status

296

Job Status11


1 Select [Yes].

YesStarts printing the document. After printing, deletes the document.

NoCancels printing the document.

Charge PrintThis feature prevents unauthorized users from operating print jobs by authenticating the users on the machine. When this feature is set, the machine prints only the jobs of authenticated users. You can also set the machine to store print jobs temporarily, and print them from the machine’s control panel.When you set to use the Charge Print feature under [Tools] > [Authentication/Security Settings] > [Authentication] > [Charge/Private Print Settings] > [Receive Control], received print jobs are saved for each Billing ID. Any jobs that were not given a Billing ID on the print driver are saved in [No User ID].For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Accounting" > "Create/View User Accounts" in the Administrator Guide.Note • This item is displayed when you have set to save in Charge Print. To set to save in Charge

Print, perform one of the following settings in the System Administration mode:• Set [Receive Control] to [Save in Charge Print].• Set [Receive Control] to [According to Print Account], and [Job Login Failure] to [Save in

Charge Print].• Set [Receive Control] to [According to Print Account] or [Private Charge Print], and [Job

without User ID] to [Save in Charge Print].For more information, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The following describes how to print or delete documents stored in Charge Print.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the user ID using the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed, and select [Enter].

3 Select [Charge Print].


297

Job Status

11



screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.• Entering a 3-digit user ID with the numeric

keypad specifies the user directly.

5 Enter the passcode, and select [Confirm].Note • If no passcode is assigned, the passcode

entry screen will not appear.



8 Select any item.

DeleteDeletes the document stored with Charge Print.Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.297).

PrintPrints the document stored with Charge Print.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.298).


1 Select [Delete].


be restored.


11 Job Status

298

Job Status11






Private Charge PrintThe feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine for each authentication user ID, and request on the machine's control panel to print the data. As the feature enables you to select and print only the necessary documents, you can avoid printing unneeded jobs. Because the machine displays only the documents of authenticated users, privacy of the users is securely protected. The Private Print feature is suitable for authenticating and managing specific users managed by the system administrator.When you set to use the Private Charge Print feature, received print jobs are saved for each authentication user ID.Note • This item is displayed when the Private Charge Print feature is enabled by using one of the

following procedures:• [According to Print Accounting] is selected, and [Job Login Success] is set to [Save in

Private Charge Print].• [Save in Private Charge Print] is selected.

When deleting the print job instructed with an invalid user ID, display the list of print jobs in the authenticated system administrator mode, and then select the job to be deleted.For more information, refer to "3 Maintenance" > "Deleting the Private Print Job with an Invalid User ID" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to set a User ID, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

The following describes how to print or delete a document stored with the Private Charge Print feature.

1 Press the <Log In/Out> button.

2 Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed, and select [Enter].

3 Select [Private Charge Print].Note • If you are authenticated as a system

administrator, selecting [Private Charge Print] will display a list of authentication user IDs. Select a user ID from the list, and then select [Document List] to display a list of documents stored for the selected user.


299

Job Status

11



6 Select any item.


DeleteDeletes the Private Charge Print document.Note • If documents with the same user ID are all deleted, the user ID will be deleted.Refer to "When [Delete] is Selected" (P.299).

PrintPrints the Private Charge Print document.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.299).


1 Select [Delete].


be restored.







11 Job Status

300

Job Status11

Public MailboxThis feature allows you to store data in the machine, and send the data by operating on a remote terminal.This section describes how to print or delete a document stored in a public mailbox.For information on how to operate Public Mailbox, refer to "Store for Polling (Allowing Remote Machines to Retrieve Documents from Your Machine)" (P.175).Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more


1 Select [Public Mailbox].

2 Select the document to be printed or deleted.Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated


screen or [ ] to move to the next screen.3 Select any item.



PrintPrints the selected document.Refer to "When [Print] is Selected" (P.300).


1 Select [Delete].


be restored.


When [Print] is SelectedStarts printing the document.


301

Job Status

11

Undelivered FaxesThis section describes how to re-send or delete an undelivered fax document. Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional package is necessary. For more

information, contact our Customer Support Center.• This feature may not be displayed depending on the system settings.

1 Select [Undelivered Faxes].

2 Select the document to be re-sent or deleted.Note • Select [Refresh] to display the updated



3 Select any item.To re-send to the previously specified fax number, press the <Start> button.

Delete This DocumentDeletes the selected document.Refer to "When [Delete This Document] is Selected" (P.301).

Change Recipients...Allows you to change the number, and re-send the document.Refer to "When [Change Recipients...] is Selected" (P.301).

When [Delete This Document] is Selected

1 Select [Delete].

DeleteDeletes the fax document.

CancelCancels deleting the fax document.

When [Change Recipients...] is SelectedSpecify a fax recipient for the undelivered fax document.Besides the fax recipient, the following features can be changed on the control panel:

Important • If the fax number is changed, the setting for adding a header will be disabled.For information on how to specify a fax number, refer to "Step 3 Specifying Destinations" (P.129).

Starting Rate

Recipient

11 Job Status

302

Job Status11

Printing Pending Jobs

This section describes how to print pending jobs.Note • If there are no pending jobs, the [Print Waiting Jobs] button is disabled.


2 Select [Print Waiting Jobs].

Handling Error Terminations

303

Job Status

11

Handling Error Terminations

This section describes how to handle error terminations.

For a Print JobSelect a job shown as an error termination in the [Completed Jobs] tab to check the error code. Follow the error code instructions.For information on error codes, refer to "14 Problem Solving" > "Error Code" in the Administrator Guide.

For a Fax JobA transmission report (undelivered) is printed.For more information on transmission reports (undelivered), refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Automatically Printed Reports/Lists" > "Transmission Report - Job Undelivered" in the Administrator Guide. For details on how to print transmission reports (undelivered) automatically, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Scan File Transfer Report" in the Administrator Guide.

For a Scan JobA transmission report (undelivered) is printed.For more information on transmission reports (undelivered), refer to "4 Machine Status" > Machine Information" > "Automatically Printed Reports/Lists" > "Transmission Report - Job Undelivered" in the Administrator Guide. For details on how to print transmission reports (undelivered) automatically, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Scan File Transfer Report" in the Administrator Guide.

For Other JobsPrint a Job History Report, and check the execution results.For information about job history reports, refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service Settings" > "Reports" > "Job History Report" in the Administrator Guide.When an error code is displayed in [Transmission Report - Job Undelivered] or [Job History Report], refer to "14 Problem Solving" > "Error Code" in the Administrator Guide.

12 Computer Operations

This chapter describes how to print documents, import scanned documents, perform Direct Fax, and operate CentreWare Internet Services on your computer.Note • Some models do not support the features described in this chapter. An optional

package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.• The computer screen images shown in this section are as of June 2008.

Features Overview....................................................................................306

Print ..........................................................................................................307

E-mail Printing ..........................................................................................310

Sending Fax..............................................................................................312

Importing Scanned Data ...........................................................................314

CentreWare Internet Services ..................................................................321


306

Com

puter Operations

12

Features Overview

This section describes the overview of features that can be operated on a computer.

PrintingSubmits a print job to the machine from a computer.For details, refer to "Print" (P.307).

E-mail PrintingSubmits a print job to the machine from a computer by sending an E-mail attached with a document in TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), or XPS format.For details, refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.310).

Sending FaxSends a fax directly from a computer.For details, refer to "Sending Fax" (P.312).

Importing Scanned DataImports documents stored in a mailbox of the machine to a computer.For details, refer to "Importing Scanned Data" (P.314).

CentreWare Internet ServicesDisplays the machine status and job status. The feature also allows you to change the settings. You can also import documents stored in a mailbox.For details, refer to"CentreWare Internet Services" (P.321).For details on how to import scanned data stored in a mailbox, refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.318).

Print

307

Com

puter Operations

12

Print

The following describes how to print with the machine by operating on a PC.

Print FeaturesThe main print features of the machine are as follows:To learn about print features, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help. For information on printing, refer to "Printing" (P.309).

Note • Some features are not available unless you perform optional component settings in the [Printer] tab. The unavailable features are grayed out.

Multiple-UpPrints multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.

2 Sided PrintingPrints data on both sides of paper.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is

necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

PosterSplits one page of print data into multiple sheets of paper and enlarges the printed image to fit the size of each sheet. Used to create large posters, etc.

Booklet CreationPerforms 2-sided printing and page allocation for printing a booklet in the correct page order. Only available when the machine has the 2-sided printing feature.Note • This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is


Transparency SeparatorsAutomatically inserts a blank sheet of paper as a separator each time a transparency is printed.

WatermarkPrints fixed text, such as "Confidential", over the print data.

Secure PrintTemporarily stores the print data on the machine, to print it with the print command from the machine. This feature allows you to set a passcode, which is helpful to print confidential documents.For information on how to print, refer to "Secure Print" (P.291).

Sample SetBefore printing multiple sets of a document, you can first print one copy for trial, and then print the rest from the machine.For information on how to print, refer to "Sample Set" (P.293).

Delayed PrintTemporarily stores the print data on the machine to print it at specified time.For information on how to print, refer to "Delayed Print" (P.294).


308

Com

puter Operations

12

Save to MailboxTemporarily stores the print data in a registered mailbox, to print it with the print command from the machine.Important • The print result of the Print from Mailbox feature may be inferior to the other print results in

quality.• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is

necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.For information on how to print, refer to "Printing Documents in a Mailbox" (P.246).

E-mail PrintingWhen the E-mail feature is available, allows you to send e-mail with the TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), or XPS format documents attachment from a computer to the machine. The received e-mail is automatically printed from the machine.Note • If the Authentication feature is enabled, received e-mails are not printed automatically.

• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is necessary. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.

For details on how to use this software, refer to "E-mail Printing" (P.310).

Print Features Using Authentication Information

Charge PrintAuthenticates users to prevent unauthorized printing. The machine holds a print job and prints it when the user is authenticated. The machine can also be configured to store multiple print jobs until the user requests to print them on the control panel.In addition, by registering a user ID and passcode for the authentication on the machine in advance, only the registered user can print the documents.Note • To prohibit users other than you from operating documents, a passcode should be

registered for the Billing ID on the print driver.For details on how to setup charge printing, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to print, refer to "Charge Print" (P.296).

Private Charge PrintThe feature allows you to temporarily store print data in the machine for each authentication user ID, and request on the machine's control panel to print the data. As the feature enables you to select and print only the necessary documents, you can avoid printing unneeded jobs. Because the machine displays only the documents of authenticated users, privacy of the users is securely protected. This feature is suitable for authenticating and managing specific users managed by the system administrator.Note • If you do not want to store unneeded documents, you can configure the machine to store

only the jobs whose authentication succeeded.For details on how to set up private charge print, refer to "5 Tools" > "Authentication/Security Settings" > "Authentication" > "Charge/Private Print Settings" in the Administrator Guide. For information on how to print, refer to "Private Charge Print" (P.298).

SetupIn order to print from your computer, a print driver must be installed on the computer.For instructions on installing the print driver, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

Note • When printing using authentication information, you must configure the settings of a printer on your computer. Set items as necessary on the [Default Settings] tab of the printer’s property screen. For more information, refer to the help of the printer.

Print

309

Com

puter Operations

12

PrintingThis section describes the print procedure.The print procedure depends on the application software you use. For details, refer to the documentation provided with the application.To learn about print features, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help.

1 Select [Print] from the [File] menu on the application.

2 Confirm [Printer Name] and click [Properties] if necessary.

3 Set the properties if necessary.Note • You can change the print

feature with [Job Type].

4 Click [OK].

5 Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.


310

Com

puter Operations

12

E-mail Printing

You can send e-mail attaching TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), or XPS documents from a computer to the machine. Received e-mail is automatically printed. This feature is called "E-mail Printing".Note • If the machine is in the authentication mode, received E-mails will not be printed

automatically.• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is


SetupTo use the E-mail Printing feature, the following setup is necessary. Check with your system or network administrator whether these settings have been completed.

Network Environment SettingsIn order to use E-mail Printing, an e-mail account must be registered.

E-mail Environment SettingsSettings for the port activation, machine's e-mail address, TCP/IP environment, e-mail server, etc.For information on E-mail Environment Settings, refer to "8 E-mail Environment Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

Sending E-MailThe following describes how to send e-mail from the computer to the machine, using Outlook Express as an example.

1 Use your e-mail software to create an e-mail body, and then attach a document to the e-mail if necessary.Important • Only plain text is permitted for the e-mail body. Change the body text format to plain text by

the e-mail software setting.• Any forwarded e-mail (that is attached to another e-mail) cannot be printed.

Note • If the extension of the attached files is other than ".tif", ".tiff", ".pdf", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpe", ".jfif", and ".xps", the file may not be printed correctly.

• Up to 31 documents can be attached.

2 Enter the machine's e-mail address as a recipient.

3 Send the e-mail.Note • The printer prints the e-mail body and the attached documents according to the following

settings. The offset output setting is disabled in all cases.

E-mail Printing

311

Com

puter Operations

12

•E-mail body:Default values of the PCL print driver for this machine which is installed on the computer

•TIFF or JPEG formatted attached file:Default values of the logical printer set in [Memory Settings] of [TIFF/JPEG] in [Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services

•PDF formatted attached file:Settings of the PDF direct print when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set to [PDF Bridge].Default values of the logical printer configured by [Logical Printer Number] of [PostScript] in [Emulation Settings] of CentreWare Internet Services when [Print Processing Mode] of the PDF direct print is set to [PS].


312

Com

puter Operations

12

Sending Fax

This section describes how to use the Direct Fax feature.The Direct Fax procedure depends on the application you use. For details, refer to the documentation provided with the application.For details on the Direct Fax feature, click [Help] on the print driver screen to see the print driver's online help.

Important • The Direct Fax feature is not available when the Fax Server is enabled.• This feature does not appear for some models. To use the feature, an optional package is


1 Select [Print] from the [File] menu on the application.

2 Select a fax printer from [Printer Name].

3 Click [Properties], and select [Fax] for [Job Type].

4 Click [OK].

5 Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

6 Specify a destination in the [Fax Recipient] dialog box.

7 Click [OK].The [Fax Job Confirmation] dialog box appears after you have sent a fax job. A list of recipients to whom the fax job is being sent will be displayed.

Registering DestinationsThe following describes how to register fax destinations from the machine to another machine (ApeosPort-III C4400, DocuCentre-III C4400) in one operation through a computer.You can use the same procedure to register fax destinations from another machine (ApeosPort-III C4400, DocuCentre-III C4400) to this machine.The registration requires CentreWare Internet Services.For information on CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.321).The control panel allows you to register destinations separately. For details, refer to "5 Tools" > "Setup" > "Add Address Book Entry" in the Administrator Guide.Important • Because CentreWare Internet Services is accessible by multiple users simultaneously, the

registered data will have a risk to be overwritten if a system administrator ID and passcode are not set. We recommend that data edit is permitted only by a system administrator with a passcode.

• Be sure not to perform this operation simultaneously with the address number registration from the control panel.

• If a number is duplicated, the existing number will be overwritten by the new one.• A file in CSV format exported by CentreWare Internet Services (address book data) is not

designed to be edited or changed by editing software. The data may be damaged when it is edited or changed. Due to the altered data, fax may be sent to undesired recipients. Therefore, do not edit or change the file in CSV format (address book data) with software such as Microsoft® Excel.

Sending Fax

313

Com

puter Operations

12

1 Start up the computer, and a web browser.

2 Enter the machine's IP address or Internet address in the browser address field and press the <Enter> key.Note • If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is

registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the URL with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the URL is "myhost.example.com".

• Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address.• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the address. The default

port number is "80".• When using the Authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into

the [User Name] and [Password] fields respectively. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

• If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.

3 Click the [Properties] tab, and select [Address Book] in the left frame on the screen.

4 Click [Map Existing Address Book] for [Export].

5 Specify the destination to save the file in.

6 Enter the IP address or Internet address of the machine (ApeosPort-III C4400, DocuCentre-III C4400) into the browser address field, and press the <Enter> key.

7 Click the [Properties] tab, and select [Address Book] in the left frame on the screen.

8 Click [Browse] in [Import] to specify the file saved in Step 5.

9 Click [Import Now].Important • Only fax destinations can be registered. Any addresses of iFax and e-mail, or destination

servers for Scan to PC cannot be registered.


314

Com

puter Operations

12

Importing Scanned Data

There are four methods for importing documents from a machine's mailbox to your computer.

Importing to a TWAIN Compatible Application......................................................................314Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3..........................................................................................316Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services........................................................................318Importing Using EasyOperator .................................................................................................320

Each procedure is as follows.

Importing to a TWAIN Compatible ApplicationThe following describes how to import documents from a machine's mailbox to application software.Network Scan Driver is used to import stored documents.Network Scan Driver is software to allow a client-side application to import documents (scan data) from a machine's mailbox via a network.To use Network Scan Driver, your computer needs to have Network Scan Utility 3 installed.Note • Install Network Scan Utility 3 using the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status must be set in advance. For more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the documentation provided with the application.For information on how to install Network Scan Driver, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to refer to the Network Scan Driver's online help.

1 Launch application software to which documents are imported.Important • The application must support TWAIN. TWAIN is a standard for scanners and other input

devices.

Note • For information on supported applications, refer to the "Readme" contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.

2 From the [File] menu, select the command for selecting the scanner (source).

3 Select [FX Network Scanner 3 TWAIN], and click [Select].

4 From the [File] menu, select the command for importing the image from the scanner.


315

Com

puter Operations

12

5 From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click [Next].Note • If no items are shown in the list, click

[Search Again]. The application searches for scanners.

• To display the scanner names, use the dialog box which can be displayed by clicking [Search/Display Settings]. For information on how to change the displayed scanner names, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.316).

• Only scanners on the network are automatically listed. To view a scanner on another network, click [Search/Display Settings], and register the IP Address and scanner name. For information on changing settings, refer to "Changing Network Scan Driver Settings" (P.316).

6 In the [Mailbox Number] field, enter the mailbox number (001 - 200) that contains the document to be imported. In the [Passcode] field, enter a password (up to 20 digits).Note • From the next time you perform this

operation and onward, you will be able to select a mailbox number from [Registered Mailboxes].

• Clicking [Select Scanner] returns to Step 5, where you can reselect a scanner.

7 Click [Confirm].

8 Select a document to import from the list, and click [Import].Note • You can select one or more

documents.• [Import], [Refresh], and

[Delete] are available from the menu that appears when you right-click on the list.

When the import starts, the scan data is forwarded from the mailbox to the client.

After the forwarding, the data is loaded onto the application software and is deleted from the mailbox.Note • An icon is attached to a document that is scanned in pages and whose forwarding operation

has not been completed.• For most applications except DocuWorks, Network Scan Driver expands the compressed

data and transfers the data to the applications in BMP format. For DocuWorks, on the other hand, Network Scan Driver transfers the data without data expansion processing. For this reason, it does not take much time for data transfer.

• The machine can be set not to delete the document from the mailbox after forwarding operation. For details on how to set this, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide.


316

Com

puter Operations

12

Changing Network Scan Driver SettingsTo learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to refer to the Network Scan Driver's online help.

Changing the display of scanner namesYou can change the display of scanner names listed.To change the display of scanner names, click [Search/Display Settings] in the scanner selection dialog box.Under [Scanner Name Display], you can change the method in which scanner names are displayed in [Scanner for Searching].Specify scanners to search for under [Search Target Settings].Note • If you register a scanner by clicking [Add],

you can display scanners from other networks.

Import Method for Scanned DocumentsYou can change the display and the import settings for documents scanned from a mailbox.To change the import method, click [Import Settings] from [File] menu in the document selection dialog box, and configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.

Importing Using Mailbox Viewer 3The following describes how to use Mailbox Viewer 3 to import a document from a machine's mailbox.Mailbox Viewer 3 is software to import documents from a machine's mailbox without using any client-side application.To use Mailbox Viewer 3, your computer needs to have Network Scan Utility 3 installed.Note • Install Network Scan Utility 3 using the CD-ROM in the Driver CD Kit.To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status must be set in advance. For more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the documentation provided with the application.For instructions on installing Mailbox Viewer 3, refer to the manual contained in the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.To learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to see the Mailbox Viewer 3 online help.

1 Click [Start] and select [Programs] > [Fuji Xerox] > [Network Scanner Utility 3] > [Mailbox Viewer 3].Note • If you used another directory for installation, specify the directory instead of above.


317

Com

puter Operations

12

2 From the displayed list, click the scanner name of the machine, and click [Next].Note • If no items are shown in the list, click

[Search Again]. The application searches for scanners.

• To display the scanner names, use the dialog box which can be displayed by clicking [Search/Display Settings]. For information on how to change the displayed scanner names, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.318).

• Only when the machine is connected to the network, the scanner name is automatically shown in the list. To view the machine connected to other networks, click on [Search/Display Settings] and register an IP address and scanner name. For information on how to change the settings, refer to "Changing the display of scanner names" (P.318).

3 In the [Mailbox Number] field, enter the number of the mailbox (001 - 200) that contains the document to be imported. In the [Passcode] field, enter a password (up to 20 digits).Note • From the next time you perform this

operation and onward, you will be able to select a mailbox number from [Registered Mailboxes].

• Clicking [Select Scanner] returns to Step 2, where you can reselect a scanner.

4 Click [Confirm].

5 Select a document from the list, and click [Import].Note • One or more documents can

be selected.• When [Always display

destination to save] is set for [File Saving Options] under the import settings, a dialog box for specifying a save destination is displayed. When the dialog box appears, specify a save destination, and select [OK].For information on Mailbox Viewer 3 settings, refer to "Import settings for scanned documents" (P.318).

6 The document is imported to the specified directory.Note • When [Save in fixed destination] is set for [File Saving Options] under the import settings, a

document is saved in the specified directory.For information on importing documents, refer to "Import settings for scanned documents" (P.318)


318

Com

puter Operations

12

Changing Mailbox Viewer 3 SettingsTo learn about fields in the displayed dialog box, click [Help] to see the Mailbox Viewer 3 online help.

Changing the display of scanner namesYou can change the display of scanner names listed.To change the display of scanner names, click [Search/Display Settings] in the scanner selection dialog box.Under [Scanner Name Display], you can change the method in which scanner names are displayed in [Scanner for Searching].Specify scanners to search for under [Search Target Settings].Note • If you register a scanner by clicking [Add],

you can display scanners from other networks.

Import settings for scanned documentsYou can change the display and the import settings for documents scanned from a mailbox.To change the import method, click [Details] from [File] menu in the document selection dialog box, and configure the settings in the dialog box that appears.

Importing Using CentreWare Internet ServicesThis section describes how to import documents stored in a machine's mailbox using CentreWare Internet Services.CentreWare Internet Services allows you to import documents from a machine's mailbox to a computer through no application software.For overview of CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services" (P.321).



319

Com

puter Operations

12


registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com".

• Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address.• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.• If using the authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the

[User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.


3 Select [Mailbox] from the [Scan] tab.

4 Click [Document List] of the mailbox that contains the documents to be imported. Note • If a passcode is set, enter the

passcode in the [Passcode] field (up to 20 digits).

5 Place a check next to each document to be imported, and click [Retrieve].

6 Click [Save this link].

For details on this operation, click [Help] in the bottom frame to see the online help.


320

Com

puter Operations

12

Importing Using EasyOperatorWhen you use Fuji Xerox applications such as EasyOperator, you can import documents stored in a machine’s mailbox to your computer without using a network scan driver.The documents in a mailbox can also be listed/displayed with thumbnails.To import documents stored in a mailbox, some items such as port status need must be set in advance. For more information, refer to "9 Scanner Environment Settings" > "Configuration of Scan to Mailbox" in the Administrator Guide. For information on the operation on the application, refer to the documentation provided with the application.

The following describes how to import documents stored in a machine’s mailbox by using EasyOperator as an example.

1 Click the [Start] menu, and select [Programs] > [Fuji Xerox] > [CentreWare EasyOperator] > [EasyOperator].Note • If you have changed the directory when installing the application, specify the new directory.

2 In the left frame of the window displayed, add a machine’s mailbox to [Mailbox].

Add the mailbox in which documents to be imported are stored.For details on how to add a mailbox, refer to the EasyOperator’s online help.

3 Select [Refresh] on the [Display] menu.

4 Click [+] on the left-hand side of [Mailbox] to display the added mailbox.When you select the added mailbox, the document will be displayed in the right frame.

5 Select [Thumbnails] in the [Display] menu to display the document with thumbnail.

6 Check the thumbnails of the document to be retrieved, and select the document.

7 Select [Retrieve] from the [Tools] menu.

8 Select a save destination in the [Browse For Folder] dialog box, and click [OK].

CentreWare Internet Services

321

Com

puter Operations

12


CentreWare Internet Services requires a TCP/IP environment, and enables you to view the status of the machine and its jobs, as well as change settings via a web browser. You can also import documents saved in a mailbox.For information on importing documents, refer to "Importing Using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.318).For CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings" in the Administrator Guide.

CentreWare Internet Services ScreenThe [CentreWare Internet Services] screen consists of five frames (divided windows).The information displayed in each frame depends on the feature: [Status], [Jobs], [Print], [Scan], [Properties], or [Support].Note • Clicking [Help] in the top frame displays the online help for CentreWare Internet Services.

Top FrameDisplayed at the top of the window. This frame includes the logo, the machine model name, a link to the online help, user information, and tabs (links) leading to each feature.For details on each feature provided by CentreWare Internet Services, click [Help] in this frame to see the help.

Right Frame / Upper Left FrameInformation appearing in the right and upper left frames changes depending on the feature. Selecting a feature displays its available features and information in these frames.

Left Center FrameDisplays the machine information and status, and the [Refresh Status] button. Clicking [Refresh Status] updates the information. This frame does not appear on the [Status] or [Properties] screen.

Lower Left FrameDisplays a link to the Fuji Xerox home page.

Top frame

Right frame

Upper left frame

Lower left frame

Left Center Frame


322

Com

puter Operations

12

Main features of CentreWare Internet Services are listed below.

Note • Some field settings take effect after a reboot (after power-cycling the machine or after changing a system setting from the control panel).

• If a setting is changed by CentreWare Internet Services during operation on the control panel, the updated information does not appear on the control panel. Power-cycle the machine in that case.

• To change the settings of items set by the system administrator, you will need to enter the user ID and passcode. Contact the system administrator for the user ID and passcode.

BrowserCentreWare Internet Services supports the following browsers:

For Windows OSMicrosoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 1 or later

Netscape Navigator 7.1 or later

For Mac OS 9.2Netscape Navigator 7.0.2 or later

For Mac OS X 10.3.9Netscape Navigator 7.1 or later

For Mac OS X 10.4

Safari 1.3 or later

Browser SettingsBefore using this service, ensure the following settings on your browser.The following is the setting procedure for Internet Explorer 6.0 SP1.

1 Select [Internet Options] from the [Tools] menu.

2 In the [General] tab, click [Settings] for [Temporary Internet Files].

Tab Name Main Features

Status Displaying the machine statusDisplaying the status of the paper trays, output trays and consumables such as toner cartridges.Linking to the copyright screen.

Jobs Deleting lists of jobs and jobs, and displaying job history and error history.

Print Job Submission Allows you to specify and print a file stored on your computer.

Scan Mailbox Allows you to register and set mailboxes.

Job flow sheets Allows you to create, edit, and delete job flow sheets.

Properties Displaying and setting the items such as Machine configuration, Interface, and Emulation settings.

Support Displaying support information


323

Com

puter Operations

12

3 In the [Settings] dialog box, select [Every visit to the page] or [Every time you start Internet Explorer] for [Check for newer versions of stored pages:].

4 Click [OK].

Proxy Server and Port NumberThe following describes proxy server settings and a port number required for this service.

Proxy ServerWe recommend that you access this service directly, not through a proxy server.Note • If using a proxy server, specifying the machine's IP address in the browser results in slower

responses, and could prevent some screens from appearing. In this case, it is necessary to set the machine's IP address on the browser not to go through a proxy server. Refer to your browser's documentation for the setting instructions.

Port NumberThe default port number of this service is "80". The port number can be changed in [Properties] > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. Usable ports are "1" to "65535".If you set the port to a number other than 80, you must add ":" and the port number after the IP address or the Internet address when entering the address into your browser.For example, if the port number is 8080, the URL is:

http://[the machine's IP address]:8080/or

http://[the machine's Internet address]:8080/You can check the port number in [Configuration Report]. For information on [Configuration Report], refer to "4 Machine Status" > "Machine Information" > "Print Reports" in the Administrator Guide.

Note • If communications are encrypted, you must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare Internet Services.

Starting CentreWare Internet ServicesTo use this service, perform the following procedure on your computer.



registered in the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet address with the combination of the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is "myhost", and the domain name is "example.com", then the Internet address is "myhost.example.com".

• Ask your system administrator for the IP address or Internet address.• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.• If using the authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode into the

[User Name] and [Password] fields. Ask your system administrator for the user ID and passcode.


• If authentication of the system administrator fails, the following message is displayed in the right frame of web browser."Authentication failed"

• If the number of times that authentication fails exceeds the set number, the following message is displayed in the right frame of web browser."Switch the machine Off and then On for System Administrator login."

13 Appendix

This chapter contains a list of terms used in this guide.Glossary....................................................................................................326

13 Appendix

326

Appendix

13

Glossary

Term Description

A3 420 × 297 mm paper

A4 297 × 210 mm paper

A5 210 × 148 mm paper

Alias An alternative name of the machine's e-mail address.For example, when the e-mail address for the machine is [email protected], you can use [email protected] (alias) to reach the same location.

Auto Center A feature that automatically moves an image to the center of paper when copying.

Auto Clear A feature that automatically returns the touch screen to its default display when the machine is inactive for a certain period of time.

Auto Paper Select Based on the document loaded and the magnification selected, the machine automatically selects an appropriate paper size.

Auto Tray Switching When paper runs out during copying, another tray of identical paper size and orientation automatically begins supplying paper.

B4 364 × 257 mm paper

B5 257 × 182 mm paper

Binding Shift When creating a booklet, this feature adds margins to the center binding area of documents.

Book Scanning A feature that copies the left and right pages of an unfolded document onto two separate sheets of paper.

Border Limit(Page split threshold value)

One more sheet is used when the length of the transmitted document exceeds the length of paper installed on the receiving terminal. A margin at the bottom of a received document can be eliminated so that the data can be printed on one page.The amount of space that can be removed from the bottom of a document is the border limit. When the border limit value is small, the data is printed on the next page. But when it is large, a larger space can be cut so that data can be printed on one page.

Calibration This refers to smoothness of colors. Calibration levels are shown in gradation steps. The greater the step, the smoother the color will be.

CMS Color Management System. It corrects device-dependent color differences to match the colors printed on your output with the colors displayed on your screen.

Collate A feature where each copy set is delivered in the same order the documents were copied.

Communication(s) A communications network that can offer voice data (telephone), image data (fax), video data (videotex) and PC data (PC communication service) over the same channel.In this guide, it is mostly referred to as transmitting/receiving images as well as speaking with a remote user.

Glossary

327

Appendix

13

Cut Paper Standard paper sizes, such as A4 and B5.

Default Screen A screen displayed on the touch screen immediately after switching the power on, or pressing the <Clear All> button. The screen is also displayed when the Auto Clear feature is used.

Default Value A factory default value, or a value set in the System Administration mode.

Dial In this guide, it refers to entering a recipient's fax number.The method of dialing provided by the machine include: manual dialing using the numeric keypad, speed dialing, one touch dialing, and using the address book, etc.

Dial Tone A tone generated from the telephone line. It indicates that you are connected to the line.

Dial Type The dial type of connected line. The machine offers two dial types: Tone (push circuit) and 10PPS (dial circuit / 10PPS).

Document Image An image of a document scanned by the machine.

DPI Dots per inch. A unit used to describe printing resolution in terms of the number of dots printed in one inch. Used as a unit to describe resolution.

ECM Error Correction Mode.A type of G3 transmission. ECM transmission sends the document image data in segments and retransmits segments that the remote machine receives incorrectly."ECM" described on the [Activity Report] shows that the communication was processed using ECM.

Edge Erase A feature that erases the top/bottom, left/right or center edge of a document image when copying.

Emulation This refers to operating the printer to achieve the same print results as when printing with other manufacturers' printers. This mode is called the Emulation Mode.

Error Code A code is displayed on the control panel or a report when a problem occurs.

F Code A transmission method defined by Communications and Information Network Association of Japan (CIAJ) for use of T.30∗ sub-addresses standardized by ITU-T. Between the machines with the F code feature, including those manufactured by other companies, various features making use of F Code can be used. (∗: Communication standard)With the Internet Fax (iFax) feature of the machine, you can use F Code to forward fax documents received in mailboxes by e-mail.

F4800 This refers to communicating with a remote terminal outside the country.It is also one of the Transmission Mode selections that reduces transmission speed to enable reliable communications even under poor line conditions.

Fax Gateway Connects the Internet network to regular telephone lines, enabling e-mail documents to be sent as fax documents to regular fax machines.

Term Description

13 Appendix

328

Appendix

13

Fax Server A feature that transfers image data received by the machine to a Server Fax server and transfers image data received by a Server Fax server to the machine via a network based on the settings you made.Using this feature enables you to manage multiple machines.

G3 A facsimile communication system standardized by the advisory committee for International Telecommunications (CCITT, now the ITU-T).

Header A record of the sender. It is printed on the top edge of a received document.

ICM Image Color Matching. A color management software used with Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. It corrects device-dependent color differences to match the colors printed on your output with the colors displayed on your screen.

Image Enhancement A feature which makes the border between black and white smooth, with rough edges reduced, giving the appearance of a higher resolution.

Image Rotation This feature rotates a document image by 90 degrees when the document orientation is not the same as the paper supply orientation.

Independent X-Y% A feature that transforms a document image horizontally or vertically.

Internet A worldwide communications network that combine miscellaneous networks.

Internet Fax Unlike a regular fax machine, Internet Fax uses corporate networks or the Internet to send or receive e-mail (TIFF attachments).

Job Offset This feature outputs sheets in alternating offsets to make each set easier to recognize.

Line Monitor Allows you to audibly monitor a transmission through the speaker after dialing and until you are connected.

Local Device This term refers to this machine. This is a general term for terminals such as telephones, facsimile machines, personal and computers.

Low Toner Alert Tone A tone the device sounds when the drum/toner cartridge needs to be replaced.

Machine Ready Tone A tone produced when the status of the machine changes from standby to ready, such as when the power is switched on.

MIME Type Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension.A method for determining what kind of data was received by e-mail. A MIME type refers to the type of data.

Multiple-Up A feature that copies two or four documents onto one sheet of paper.

NV Memory A non-volatile memory, which stores the settings information of the printer even when the printer is switched off.

Off-hook Dialing Dialing with the handset off the hook.

On-hook Dialing Dialing with the handset on the cradle.

Term Description

Glossary

329

Appendix

13

Optional accessory This refers to a product that is sold separately. In addition to the machine's basic configuration, various optional features are available as separately-sold optional accessories. (For more information on optional accessories, contact our Customer Support Center.)

PJL Printer Job Language.A command language for controlling printers developed by Hewlett Packard.

Polling A feature that allows you to retrieve a document from a remote machine.

POP3 Post Office Protocol Version 3.One of the commonly used communications protocols used for receiving e-mail.It sets up a private mailbox on a provider's e-mail server, and receives messages when a communication is made. POP3 is for receiving only. SMTP is used for sending e-mail.

Energy Saver Feature A feature that switches the machine status to standby after a period of inactivity.The following energy saver features can be set for the machine.Low Power Mode: The power to the fuser unit and motor is

lowered when the machine is left unused for a fixed amount of time. The touch screen goes out, and the <Energy Saver> button lights.

Sleep Mode: Most of the units in the machine are in standby status. The machine consumes the least power.

Print Page Buffer A location where print data is rendered.

Printable Area The actual area on paper which can be printed.

Profile A protocol controlling image resolution, paper size, and other attributes when sending or receiving faxes using Internet Fax (iFax). The profiles that can be used vary with the Internet Fax of the remote terminal. When specifying a profile, check that it can be handled by the other party's iFax-compatible machine.

RAM Random Access Memory. It is a storage device (memory) where information can be retrieved as well as stored.

Receive Buffer A space used to temporarily store data sent from a client computer.

Receiving Paper Size A feature that specifies the output paper size for received fax documents. The specified paper size will be declared to recipients from the sender.

Recipient The person or terminal you send a document to. "Dialing" indicates the operation of entering a recipient's telephone number.For Internet Fax (iFax), this refers to the recipient's e-mail address.

Remote Terminal A terminal with which you want to communicate. This is a general term for terminals such as telephones, facsimile machines and personal computers.

Term Description

13 Appendix

330

Appendix

13

Resolution Represents a fineness of detail that can be distinguished on an image. It is usually described in terms of the number of dots per square inch (dpi), and a higher value indicates a higher resolution (finely represented).

ROM Read Only Memory. It is a storage device (memory) specific for the retrieval of information.

ROS Raster Output Scanner. It is a device for writing image signals to a drum (light sensitive). A ROS is often referred to as a laser beam scanner.

Scan Sensing or reading a paper document and converting the optical image of the document to an electronic image.The machine offers two scanning devices: document glass and document feeder.

Screen The screen that is displayed on the touch screen. It displays messages and feature buttons.

Select In this document, "Select" refers to highlighting a feature selection by touching the feature button on the touch screen with your finger.

Send Password This feature requires to enter an "S" and the ID of a remote terminal after entering its fax number. This prevents transmission errors.

Sender Originator of a communication. It is used as opposed to "recipient".

Separator A blank, colored, or copied paper inserted between two copy sets.

Side Tray A feature that outputs copies to the Side Tray with the copied face up.

SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.A communications protocol (an agreement governing the way data is transmitted) commonly used for sending and receiving e-mail.

Start Reservation In this guide, this refers to loading a document, selecting features, and pressing the <Start> button immediately after switching the power on. Once the machine is warmed up and ready, it will automatically start copying.

Status Display Code A code that indicates the machine status. When an error occurs on the machine, a status display code appears on the touch screen.

Store In this guide, it is referred to as scanning an image of a document and saving the image on the machine.

Stored Programming By registering a series of operations, the machine executes the operations with just one press of [Stored Programming] on the touch screen.

Super G3 (SG3) A G3 communication system conforming to ITU V.34.This system offers higher transmission speed (33.6 kbps) than the normal G3 mode.

Transmission Interval The period between transmissions.

Transparency Copy A feature that copies on transparency films or inserts a sheet of blank or copied paper between transparency films.

Term Description

Glossary

331

Appendix

13

UNC UNC (Universal Naming Convention) is a way to specify a path describing the location of a network resource, such as shared folders, or shared printers, on a network, Microsoft Networks (SMB). The UNC syntax uses "\\" before the hostname, hostname and resource name are delimited by "\".If the hostname is "myhost", and if its host shared folder name is "sharefolder", the UNC syntax is described as follows:\\myhost\sharefolder

Term Description

Index

333

Index

Symbols

+ Add ................................................................. 144

Numerics

10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX connector .................. 352 Sided Book Copying ........................................ 802 Sided Printing ................................................. 3072 Sided Scanning ...................................... 150, 216

A

<Access> indicator ............................................ 279Add Me .............................................................. 205adding a comment/a date/page numbers to copies ............................................................ 101adding originals ................................................. 120adding sender name and phone number to faxes ............................................................. 161adding the sender’s address ............................. 205Address Book .................................... 145, 201, 212adjusting color balance ....................................... 78adjusting contrast ........................................ 76, 226adjusting copy density/sharpness/saturation of images ................................................................ 75adjusting fax density ......................................... 149adjusting scan density and image sharpness ... 226adjusting the color tone ....................................... 78adjusting the copy density ................................... 73adjusting the image position ............................... 85Advanced Settings ............................................ 225<All Services> button .................................... 47, 49allowing remote machines to retrieve documents from your machine .......................... 175Annotations ....................................................... 101attaching covers to copies .................................. 95Auto Detect ............................................... 153, 230Auto Receive ..................................................... 187

B

Background Suppression .................................. 226

Batch Print ......................................................... 247B-Finisher ............................................................ 39Book Copying ...................................................... 79Book Faxing ....................................................... 155Book Scanning .................................................. 229Booklet ................................................................. 92Booklet Creation .......................................... 92, 307booklet tray .......................................................... 40booklet unit .......................................................... 40bottom left cover .................................................. 35breaker ................................................................ 43brightness dial ..................................................... 49Broadcast .......................................................... 178Broadcast Send ................................. 134, 144, 182Browse ............................................................... 212Build Job ............................................................ 115

C

<C (Clear)> button ......................................... 47, 49Calculator % ........................................................ 66calling a stored program .................................... 268calling a stored program for build Job ............... 269Cancel ............................................................... 289center output tray ................................................. 34center tray ............................................................ 40center tray exit ..................................................... 39CentreWare Internet Services ................... 318, 321C-Finisher ............................................................ 40changing the orientation of images ...................... 87Chapter Start ..................................................... 118Charge Print .............................................. 296, 308checking completed jobs ................................... 290checking the finished output of the copy ........... 119checking/selecting mailbox documents ............. 241circuit breaker ...................................................... 43<Clear All> button .......................................... 46, 49Color .................................................................... 72Color Balance ...................................................... 78Color Effects ........................................................ 77Color Scanning .................................................. 215Color Shift ............................................................ 78Color Space ....................................................... 227

Index

334

Index

Combine Original Sets .......................................120combining multiple pages into one sheet ...........166<CompactFlash Eject> button ...........................279CompactFlash slot .............................................279Compression Method .........................................219confirmation indicator ...........................................37confirming remote machine response prior to transmission .......................................................176confirming the fax job in Job Status ...................131Contrast .............................................................227control panel ........................................................34Copies ..................................................................90Copy Output ....................................................... 112copying both sides of an ID card ....................... 113copying facing pages onto separate sheets ........79copying multiple pages onto one sheet ...............98Cover Page ........................................................162Covers .................................................................95creating a booklet ................................................92<Custom> buttons .........................................47, 48

D

Delay Start .........................................................160Delayed Print .............................................294, 307Delete Outside/Delete Inside .............................121deleting charge print documents ........................297deleting outside or inside of the selected area ..121deleting private charge print documents ............299deleting secure print documents ........................292deleting stored documents .................................291deleting stored programs ...................................266density levels .....................................................226<Dial Pause> button ......................................47, 49Digital Signature ........................................172, 238Direct Fax ..........................................................312document cover ...................................................34document feeder ..................................54, 126, 192document feeder tray ...........................................37document glass ........................34, 37, 55, 127, 193document guides .................................................37Document Name ................................................237document output tray ...........................................37DocuWorks ................................................218, 219drum cartridge ......................................................36duplex module cover ............................................35

E

Edge Erase .................................................. 84, 231editing a recipient .............................................. 205editing the Internet Fax mail contents ............... 164ejecting media ................................................... 280E-mail ................................................................ 201E-mail Printing ........................................... 308, 310Encryption ......................................................... 171<Energy Saver> button ................................. 46, 49Energy Saver mode ............................................. 44enlarged copies ................................................... 63Enter Output Size .............................................. 233entering an address ........................................... 204entering specific symbols .................................. 148entering text ......................................................... 51entering the e-mail body .................................... 207entering/changing a stored program name ....... 266erasing edges and margin shadows in the document ..................................................... 231erasing edges and margin shadows of the document ....................................................... 84erasing the background color of documents ................................................... 76, 226exit cover ............................................................. 40

F

F Code ............................................................... 168Facsimile Information Services ......... 173, 177, 189Fax .................................................................... 143fax interface connector ........................................ 35Fax/Internet Fax ................................................ 143Fax/Internet Fax Options ................................... 157File Format ........................................................ 218File Name .......................................................... 236File Name Conflict ............................................. 237finisher top cover button ...................................... 39finisher transport cover ........................................ 39finisher tray .................................................... 39, 40Folding ................................................................111Forced 4800 bps ............................................... 159From .................................................................. 206front cover ............................................... 34, 39, 40front transport cover ............................................ 40fuser .................................................................... 36

Index

335

Index

G

G3 ..................................................................... 159General Scan Features ..................................... 215

H

handle ................................................................. 36handling error terminations ............................... 303Hidden Text ........................................................110

I

ID Card Copying ................................................113iFax transmission .............................................. 136Image Enhancement ................................... 76, 226Image Options ............................................. 75, 226Image Rotation .................................................... 87Image Shift .......................................................... 85importing scanned data ..................................... 314Independent X - Y% ............................................ 65Index Print ......................................................... 285inner cover .......................................................... 37inserting blank sheets between transparencies .. 97inserting media .................................................. 280Internet Fax ....................................................... 143Internet Fax Message ....................................... 164Internet Fax Profile ............................................ 170Internet Fax Subject .......................................... 164<Interrupt> button ......................................... 47, 49Invert Image ........................................................ 89

J

Job Assembly .....................................................115Job Flow Sheets ............................................... 256<Job in Memory> indicator ............................ 46, 49Job Status ......................................................... 288<Job Status> button ...................................... 46, 49JPEG ................................................................. 219

L

Layout Adjustment .............................. 79, 153, 228left center cover .................................................. 35left cover ............................................................. 37

lever ..................................................................... 37license ................................................................. 25Lighten/Darken ...................................... 73, 75, 149LINE 1 .................................................................. 38LINE 2 .................................................................. 38LINE 4 .................................................................. 38loading documents ............................................ 192local terminal information ................................... 147locking casters ..................................................... 34<Log In/Out> button ....................................... 46, 49Login Name ....................................................... 238Low Power Mode ................................................. 44

M

machine components .......................................... 34<Machine Status> button ............................... 46, 49Mailbox .............................................................. 240Mailbox Receive ................................................ 188Mailbox Viewer 3 ............................................... 197making 2-sided copies of facing pages ............... 80making enlarged copies spread over multiple sheets .................................................................. 99making enlarged/reduced copies ......................... 63making multiple copies on a single sheet ...........111making multiple copies on one sheet ................ 100making reversed copies of images ...................... 89managing documents security ........................... 109Manual Receive ................................................. 187Manual Send ..................................................... 176Media Print ........................................................ 276Media Print - Photos .................................. 276, 283Media Print - Text ...................................... 276, 284Media Print Kit ................................................... 276Message ............................................................ 207Meta Data .......................................................... 238Mirror Image/Negative Image .............................. 89Mixed Sized Originals .......................... 83, 154, 230MRC High Compression .................................... 219mTIFF ................................................................ 219Multiple-Up .......................................... 98, 166, 307

N

Network Scan Driver .......................................... 316Network Scanning ............................................. 209

336

Index

New Recipient ....................................................204non-standard size document ...............................82Non-target Area Color ..........................................72numeric keypad .............................................47, 49

O

One touch buttons .......................................47, 147One touch panels .................................................47On-hook .............................................................176<Online> indicator ..........................................46, 49OP.TEL ................................................................38Original Orientation ........83, 85, 86, 89, 90, 98, 101Original Size ........................................82, 153, 230Original Type .......................................74, 151, 217Originals ...............................................................90Output Color ........................................................69Output Format ......................................................92output tray ......................................................34, 40

P

paper stopper .......................................................34Paper Supply .......................................................67parallel interface connector ..................................35Password ...................................................214, 238PDF ............................................................218, 219Photo .................................................................217Photo & Text ......................................................217Photographs ......................................................225Poster ..........................................................99, 307power switch ........................................................34preferentially printing pending jobs ....................302Preset Repeat Image ......................................... 111Primary Relay Station ID ...................................185Print ...................................................................309print driver ..........................................................308printing control numbers on the background of copies ................................................................107printing delayed print documents .......................296printing documents in a mailbox ........................246printing multiple sets at the destination machine .............................................................165printing private charge print documents .............299printing sample set documents ..........................294printing secure print documents .........................293

printing stored documents ................................. 291Priority Send ...................................................... 160Private Charge Print .................................. 298, 308processing documents scanned with different settings as one job ............................................ 115Promote Job ...................................................... 289Proportional % ............................................. 65, 233Public Mailbox ................................................... 300Punching ........................................................... 113

Q

Quality/File Size ................................................ 234

R

Read Receipts ................................................... 235receiver .............................................................. 176Recipient Print Sets ........................................... 165Recipient(s) ....................................................... 205Reduce/Enlarge ......................................... 156, 233reduced copies .................................................... 63registering stored programs .............................. 264Remote Mailbox ................................................ 166Remote Polling .................................................. 173removing/confirming a recipient ........................ 149Repeat Image .................................................... 100Reply To ............................................................ 236<RESET> button ................................................. 35Resolution ................................................. 151, 228retrieving documents from remote machines .... 173<Review> button ........................................... 46, 49RSA BSAFE ........................................................ 25

S

Sample Job ....................................................... 119Sample Set ................................................ 293, 307Saturation ............................................................ 76Save to Mailbox ................................................. 308saving the scanned data ................................... 197scan density ...................................................... 226Scan to Mailbox ................................................. 208Scan to PC ........................................................ 211scanning a color photograph ............................. 225scanning both sides of a document ................... 216

Index

337

Index

scanning different size documents simultaneously .................................... 83, 154, 230scanning facing pages on separate sheets ....................................................... 155, 229Searchable Text ................................................ 219Secondary Relay Station ID .............................. 185Secure Print .............................................. 291, 307Secure Watermark ............................................ 109Segment Separators ..........................................117selecting a communication mode ...................... 159selecting a file format for output data ................ 218selecting a mailbox ........................................... 242selecting an image quality ................................... 77selecting an output color ................................... 215selecting files .................................................... 281selecting iFax/Fax ............................................. 143selecting the color for copying ............................ 69selecting the document type ............... 74, 151, 217selecting the paper for copying ........................... 67selecting/changing a job flow sheet .................. 258Send from Mailbox ............................................ 240sending e-mail with a digital signature by S/MIME ........................................................ 238Sending faxes to multiple recipients ................. 144sending iFax encrypted by S/MIME .................. 171sending iFax with a digital signature by S/MIME ........................................................ 172sending in sections ........................................... 235Server ............................................................... 213Server Fax ........................................................ 141setting the action to be taken for file name conflict ............................................................... 237setting the printing options ................................ 283setting the sender’s address ............................. 206setting the subject ............................................. 207Shadow Suppression ........................................ 227Shared Name .................................................... 213Sharpness ........................................................... 76sharpness ......................................................... 226side output tray ................................................... 36Sideways Images .............................................. 217Sleep Mode ......................................................... 44Source Color ....................................................... 71Specifying a Destination ................................... 213specifying a destination PC by browsing your network ............................................................. 212

specifying a destination PC using the address book ............................................... 212specifying a destination PC using the screen keyboard ............................................................ 213specifying a destination using a one touch button ....................................................... 147specifying a destination using an address number ............................................ 146specifying a destination using the address book ..................................................... 145specifying a name for the file to be saved ......... 237specifying a name for the file to be sent ............ 236specifying a reply address ................................. 236specifying a scan ratio ....................................... 156specifying a scan size ........................................ 230specifying a scanning ratio ................................ 233specifying a scanning resolution ........................ 228specifying an e-mail address ............................. 201specifying an image compression ratio when scanning ................................................... 234specifying color space ....................................... 227specifying destination using the keyboard screen ................................................ 147specifying destinations ...................................... 129specifying finishing options ................................ 112specifying Internet Fax profiles .......................... 170specifying read receipts ..................................... 235specifying Send Priority ..................................... 160specifying Send Time ........................................ 160specifying the Internet Fax subject .................... 164specifying the orientation of the loaded documents ............................................... 89specifying the scan size for the document ........... 82specifying the scan size for the original ............. 153specifying the scanning resolution ..................... 151<Speed Dial> button ...................................... 47, 49Speed Dialing .................................................... 146Split Send .......................................................... 235stand .................................................................... 39Standard Size ............................................ 154, 230staple cartridge .............................................. 39, 40Stapling .............................................................. 112<Start> button ................................................ 47, 49Starting Rate ...................................................... 159<Stop> button ................................................ 47, 49stopper ................................................................. 36

338

Index

stopping the fax job ............................................132Store for Polling .................................................175Subject ...............................................................207suppressing the document background .............227

T

Target Area Color ................................................72TEL ......................................................................38Text ....................................................................217TIFF ...................................................................219TIFF/JPEG Auto Select .....................................218TIFF-F ................................................................171TIFF-J ................................................................171TIFF-S ................................................................171toner cartridge ......................................................36top left cover ........................................................35touch screen ..................................................46, 48Transfer Protocol ............................................... 211Transmission Header Text .................................161transmitting 2-sided originals .............................150transmitting documents with a cover page ........162Transparency Options .........................................97Transparency Separators ..................................307Tray 1 ...................................................................34Tray 2 ...................................................................34Tray 3 ...................................................................34Tray 4 ...................................................................34Tray 5 (bypass) ....................................................34

U

Undelivered Faxes .............................................301Upright Images ..................................................217USB 2.0 interface connector ................................35User Name .........................................................213using F Code transmission ................................168using remote mailbox .........................................166

V

variable size .......................................................230

W

waste toner bottle cover .......................................36

Watermark ................................................. 107, 307Web Applications ............................................... 272

X

XPS ................................................................... 219

ApeosPort-III C4400, DocuCentre-III C4400User Guide

ME4292E2-1 (Edition 1)July 2008

Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2008 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.